1763-UM001G-EN-P MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual

User Manual

Original Instructions

MicroLogix 1100

Programmable Controllers

Bulletin 1763 Controllers and 1762 Expansion I/O

2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Important User Information

Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before

you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to

requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably

trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this

equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with

any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

These labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

The following icon may appear in the text of this document.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,

which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property

damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous

voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may

reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to

potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL

Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

Identifies information that is useful and can help to make a process easier to do or easier to understand.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 3

Table of Contents

Preface

About This Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Purpose of this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Download Firmware, AOP, EDS, and Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 1

Hardware Overview Hardware Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

MicroLogix 1100 Memory Module and Built-in Real-time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

1762 Expansion I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Communication Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Install Your Controller Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Hazardous Location Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Disconnecting Main Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Safety Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Isolation Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Power Supply Inrush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Loss of Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Input States on Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Other Types of Line Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Help Prevent Excessive Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Master Control Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Emergency Stop Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Install a Memory Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Using the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Connecting the Battery Wire Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Controller Mounting Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Controller and

Expansion I/O Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Mount the Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

DIN Rail Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1762 Expansion I/O Module Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Mount 1762 Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

DIN Rail Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Table of Contents

Connect Expansion I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Chapter 3

Wire Your Controller Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Wiring Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Wiring the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Use Surge Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Recommended Surge Suppressors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Ground the Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Terminal Block Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Terminal Groupings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB, and 1763-L16DWD Wiring Diagrams . . . 35

Controller I/O Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Minimizing Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Wire Your Analog Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Minimize Electrical Noise on Analog Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Ground Your Analog Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Expansion I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Digital Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Analog Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 4

Communication Connections Supported Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Default Communication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Use the Communications Toggle Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Change Communication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Connect to the RS-232 Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Make a DF1 Point-to-point Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Use a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Connect to a DF1 Half-duplex Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Connecting to a DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

DH-485 Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

DH-485 Communication Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Ground and Terminate the DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Connect the AIC+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Cable Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Recommended User-supplied Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Install and Attach the AIC+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Power the AIC+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Connecting to Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Ethernet Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 5

Table of Contents

Chapter 5

Use the LCD and Keypad Operating Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Startup Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Main Menu and Default Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Operating Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Select Between Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Cursor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Setting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

I/O Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

View I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Monitor Bit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Target Bit File Number (TBF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Monitor a Bit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Monitor Integer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Target Integer File Number (TIF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Monitor an Integer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Use the Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Controller Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Change Mode Switch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Use a User-defined LCD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

User-defined LCD Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Configure Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Change Key In Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Key In Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Change Key In Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Communications Toggle Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Ethernet Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Trimpots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Trimpot Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Changing Data Value of a Trimpot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Trimpot Configuration in LCD Function File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

View System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

View Fault Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Chapter 6

Use Real-time Clock and

Memory Modules

Real-time Clock Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Operation at Power-up and Entering a Run or Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Write Data to the Real-time Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

RTC Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Memory Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

User Program, User Data, and Recipe Back-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Program Compare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Data File Download Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Memory Module Write Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Removal/Insertion Under Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Memory Module Information File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Program/Data Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Program/Data Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Table of Contents

Chapter 7

Online Editing Overview of Online Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Online Editing Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Effects of Online Editing On Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

System Impacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Data Table File Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Online Edit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Directions and Cautions for MicroLogix 1100 Online Edit User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Change the RSLinx “Configure CIP Option”

(OS Series A FRN 1, 2, and 3 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

A Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Types of Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Edit Functions in Program Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Appendix A

Specifications MicroLogix 1100 Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

1762 Expansion I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Digital I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Appendix B

Replacement Parts MicroLogix 1100 Replacement Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Lithium Battery (1763-BA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Battery Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Appendix C

Troubleshoot Your System Understand the Controller Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Controller Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Status Indicators on the LCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

I/O Status Indicators on the LCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Controller Error Recovery Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Analog Expansion I/O Diagnostics and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Module Operation and Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Power-up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Critical and Non-critical Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Module Error Definition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Calling Rockwell Automation for Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 7

Table of Contents

Appendix D

Use ControlFLASH to Upgrade

Your Operating System

Prepare for Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Install ControlFLASH Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Use DMK Extraction Tool for Firmware Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Prepare the Controller for Firmware Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Sequence of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Missing or Corrupt OS LED Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Appendix E

Connect to Networks via RS-

232/RS-485 Interface

RS-232 Communication Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

RS-485 Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

DF1 Full-duplex Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

DF1 Half-duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

DF1 Half-duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi-drop Link . . . . 147

Use Modems with MicroLogix Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

DH-485 Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

DH-485 Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Devices that use the DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Important DH-485 Network Planning Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Example DH-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Modbus Communication Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Appendix F

Connect to Networks via

Ethernet Interface

MicroLogix 1100 Controllers and Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

MicroLogix 1100 Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

MicroLogix 1100 and Computer Connections to the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Connect an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Ethernet Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Duplicate IP address Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Configure the Ethernet Channel on the MicroLogix 1100 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Configure Using RSLogix 500 Programming Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Configure Using BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Using the Rockwell Automation BOOTP/DHCP Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Use a DHCP Server To Configure Your Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Subnet Masks and Gateways. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

MicroLogix 1100 Embedded Web Server Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Appendix G

System Loading and Heat

Dissipation

System Loading Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

System Loading Example Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

System Loading Worksheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Current Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Calculating Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Table of Contents

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 9

Preface

About This Publication Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing, programming, or

troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix™ 1100 controllers.

You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic. If

you do not, obtain the proper training before using this product.

Rockwell Automation recognizes that some of the terms that are currently used in our industry

and in this publication are not in alignment with the movement toward inclusive language in

technology. We are proactively collaborating with industry peers to find alternatives to such

terms and making changes to our products and content. Please excuse the use of such terms

in our content while we implement these changes.

Purpose of this Manual This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1100 controllers and 1762 expansion I/O. It

describes the procedures that you use to install, wire, and troubleshoot your controller. This

manual:

• Explains how to install and wire your controllers

• Gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1100 controller system

See the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,

publication 1763-RM001

, for the MicroLogix 1100 instruction set and for application examples to

show the instruction set in use. See your RSLogix 500® programming software user

documentation for more information on programming your MicroLogix 1100 controller.

Download Firmware, AOP,

EDS, and Other Files

Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product release

notes from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at rok.auto/pcdc

Summary of Changes This publication contains the following new or updated information. This list includes

substantive updates only and is not intended to reflect all changes.

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell

Automation. You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.

Topic Page

Updated template throughout

Added inclusive language acknowledgment 9

Updated General Specifications 111

Updated Environmental Specifications 121, 126

Updated Certifications 122, 127

Additional Resources

Resource Description

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,

publication 1763-RM001

Information on the MicroLogix 1100 controllers instruction set.

AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter User Manual, publication 1761-UM004

A description on how to install and connect an AIC+. This manual also contains information

on network wiring.

DeviceNet Interface User Manual, publication 1761-UM005

Information on how to install, configure, and commission a DeviceNet® Interface (DNI).

DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual, publication 1770-RM516

Information on DF1 open protocol.

Modbus Protocol Specifications, available from www.modbus.org Information about the Modbus protocol.

System Security Design Guidelines Reference Manual,

publication SECURE-RM001

Provides guidance on how to conduct security assessments, implement Rockwell

Automation products in a secure system, harden the control system, manage user access,

and dispose of equipment.

UL Standards Listing for Industrial Control Products,

publication CMPNTS-SR002

Assists original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) with construction of panels, to help ensure

that they conform to the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories.

Industrial Components Preventive Maintenance, Enclosures, and Contact

Ratings Specifications, publication IC-TD002

Provides a quick reference tool for Allen-Bradley industrial automation controls and

assemblies.

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Preface

Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of

Solid-state Control, publication SGI-1.1

Designed to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1987 and provides

general guidelines for the application, installation, and maintenance of solid-state control in

the form of individual devices or packaged assemblies incorporating solid-state

components.

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1

Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.

Product Certifications website, rok.auto/certifications Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.

Additional Resources (Continued)

Resource Description

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 11

Chapter 1

Hardware Overview

Hardware Features The MicroLogix 1100 programmable controller contains a power supply, input and output

circuits, a processor, an isolated combination RS-232/RS-485 communication port, and an

Ethernet port. Each controller supports 18 I/O points (10 digital inputs, 2 analog inputs, and 6

discrete outputs).

The hardware features of the controller are shown in Figure 1

Figure 1 - Controller Hardware Features

Controller Description

Description Description

1 Output terminal block 7 LCD keypad (ESC, OK, Up, Down, Left, Right)

2 Battery connector 8 Status indicators

3 Bus connector interface to expansion I/O 9

Memory module port cover

(1)

or memory module

(2)

4 Battery 10 DIN rail latches

5 Input terminal block 11 RS-232/RS-485 communication port (Channel 0, isolated)

6 LCD display 12 Ethernet port (Channel 1)

(1) Shipped with controller

(2) Optional equipment

ESC OK

Left side view

Top view

Table 1 - Controller Input Power and Embedded I/O

Catalog Number

Description

Input Power Digital Inputs Analog Inputs Digital Outputs

1763-L16AWA 120/240V AC 10 120V AC

2 voltage input

0...10V DC

6 relays

All individually isolated

1763-L16BWA 120/240V AC

6 24V DC

4 high-speed 24V DC

(1)

2 voltage input

0...10V DC

6 relays

All individually isolated

1763-L16BBB 24V DC

6 24V DC

4 high-speed 24V DC

(1)

2 voltage input

0...10V DC

2 relays (isolated)

2 24V DC FET

2 high-speed 24V DC FET

1763-L16DWD 12...24V DC

6 12...24V DC

4 high-speed 12/24V DC

(1)

2 voltage input

0...10V DC

6 relays

All individually isolated

(1) The four high-speed inputs (inputs 0…3) can be used individually for pulse catch/latching inputs or combined as a high-speed counter. See Digital Input Specifications on page 112 and the

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

, for more information.

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 1 Hardware Overview

Component Descriptions MicroLogix 1100 Memory Module and Built-in Real-time Clock

The controller has a built-in real-time clock to provide a reference for applications that need

time-based control.

The controller is shipped with a memory module port cover in place. You can order a memory

module, 1763-MM1, as an accessory. The memory module provides an optional backup of your

user program and data, and is a means to transport your programs between controllers.

The program and data in your MicroLogix 1100 controller is nonvolatile and is stored when the

power is lost to the controller. The memory module provides additional backup that can be

stored separately. The memory module does not increase the available memory of the

controller.

Figure 2 - 1763-MM1 Memory Module

1762 Expansion I/O Modules

1762 expansion I/O modules can be connected to the MicroLogix 1100 controller, as shown in

Figure 3.

Figure 3 - 1762 Expansion I/O Modules

A maximum of four I/O modules, in any combination, can be connected to a

controller. See System Loading and Heat Dissipation on page 165

to determine how

much heat a certain combination generates.

1762 expansion I/O module 1762 expansion I/O modules connected to a MicroLogix 1100 controller

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 13

Chapter 1 Hardware Overview

Communication Cables Use only the following communication cables with the MicroLogix 1100 controllers. These

cables are required for Class I Division 2 applications.

• 1761-CBL-AM00, series C or later

• 1761-CBL-AP00, series C or later

• 1761-CBL-PM02, series C or later

• 1761-CBL-HM02, series C or later

• 1761-CBL-PH02, series A or later

• 1761-CBL-AH02, series A or later

• 2707-NC9, series C or later

•1763-NC01, series A or later

Programming Program the MicroLogix 1100 controller using RSLogix 500 software, version 7.00.00 or later.

To use the latest features, you must use RSLogix 500 software, version 7.20.00 or later.

Communication cables for programming are available separately from the controller and

software.

Expansion I/O Modules

Catalog Number Description

Digital

1762-IA8 8-point 120V AC input module

1762-IQ8 8-point sinking/sourcing 24V DC input module

1762-IQ16 16-point sinking/sourcing 24V DC input module

1762-IQ32T 32-point sinking/sourcing 24V DC input module

1762-OA8 8-point 120/240V AC Triac output module

1762-OB8 8-point sourcing 24V DC output module

1762-OB16 16-point sourcing 24V DC output module

1762-OB32T 32-point sourcing 24V DC output module

1762-OV32T 32-point sinking 24V DC output module

1762-OW8 8-point AC/DC relay output module

1762-OW16 16-point AC/DC relay output module

1762-OX6I 6-point isolated AC/DC relay output module

1762-IQ8OW6 8-point sinking/sourcing 24V DC input and 6-point AC/DC relay output module

Analog

1762-IF4 4-channel voltage/current analog input module

1762-OF4 4-channel voltage/current analog output module

1762-IF2OF2 Combination 2-channel input 2-channel output voltage/current analog module

Temperature

1762-IR4 4-channel RTD/resistance input module

1762-IT4 4-channel thermocouple/mV input module

ATTENTION: UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION

Do not connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to another MicroLogix family

controller such as MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix 1500, or the

network port of a 1747-DPS1 port splitter with a 1761- CBL-AM00 (8-pin

mini-DIN to 8-pin mini-DIN) cable or equivalent.

This type of connection damages the RS-232/RS-485 communication port

(Channel 0) of the MicroLogix 1100 and/or the controller itself. The

communication pins that are used for RS-485 communications on the

MicroLogix 1100 controller are alternately used for 24V power on the other

MicroLogix controllers and the network port of the 1747-DPS1 port splitter.

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 1 Hardware Overview

Communication Options MicroLogix 1100 controllers provide two communications ports: an isolated combination

RS-232/RS-485 communication port (Channel 0) and an Ethernet port (Channel 1).

You can connect the isolated Channel 0 port on the MicroLogix 1100 controller to the following:

• Operator interfaces, personal computers, and so on, using DF1 Full-duplex

point-to-point

• A DH-485 network

• A DF1 Radio Modem network

• A DF1 Half-duplex network as an RTU master or RTU slave

• A Modbus network as an RTU master or RTU slave

• An ASCII network

• An Ethernet network using the Ethernet Interface module

(1761-NET-ENI or 1761-NET-ENIW)

When connecting to a DH-485 network, DF1 Half-duplex network

(a)

or a Modbus network, the

MicroLogix 1100 controller can be connected directly to Channel 0 (without an Advanced

Interface Converter, 1761-NET-AIC). The Channel 0 combo port provides both RS-232 and

RS-485 isolated connections. The appropriate electrical interface is selected through your

choice of communication cable. The existing MicroLogix 1761 communication cables provide

an interface to the RS-232 drivers. The 1763-NC01 cable provides an interface to the RS-485

drivers (for DH-485, Modbus RTU Master, RTU slave networks, DF1 Half-duplex master

(a)

, and

DF1 Half-duplex slave

(a)

The controller may also be connected to serial devices, such as barcode readers, weigh scales,

serial printers, and other intelligent devices, using ASCII. See Default Communication

Configuration on page 51 for the configuration settings for Channel 0. MicroLogix 1100

controllers can be connected directly to the RS-485 network via channel 0, using ASCII

(a)

The MicroLogix 1100 controller supports EtherNet/IP™ communication via the Ethernet

communication Channel 1. You can connect your controller to a local area network that

provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. This port supports

CIP™ explicit messaging (message exchange) only. The controller cannot be used for CIP

implicit messaging (real-time I/O messaging). The controller also includes an embedded web

server, which allows viewing of not only module information, TCP/IP configuration, and

diagnostic information, but also includes the data table memory map and data table monitor

screen using a standard web browser.

See Communication Connections on page 51

for more information on connecting to the

available communication options.

(a) OS series B FRN 4 or later.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 15

Chapter 2

Install Your Controller

Installation Considerations Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure (Pollution Degree 2

(a)

) to

reduce the effects of electrical interference (Over Voltage Category II

(b)

) and environmental

exposure. Locate your controller as far as possible from power lines, load lines, and other

sources of electrical noise such as hard-contact switches, relays, and AC motor drives. For

more information on proper grounding guidelines, see the Industrial Automation Wiring and

Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-4.1

Safety Considerations Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation. Actively

considering the safety of yourself and others, and the condition of your equipment, is of

primary importance. We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations.

Hazardous Location Considerations

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, or non-hazardous

locations only. The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations.

(a) Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally

temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation shall be expected.

(b) Overvoltage Category II is the load-level section of the electrical distribution system. At this level, transient voltages are

controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the product’s insulation.

ATTENTION: Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices

inside the controller. Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas.

ATTENTION: Vertical mounting of the controller is not supported due to heat

build-up considerations.

ATTENTION: Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your

controller or other equipment within the enclosure or panel. Drilled fragments

that fall into the controller or I/O modules could cause damage. Do not drill

holes above a mounted controller if the protective debris shields are removed

or the processor is installed.

ATTENTION: Do not place the MicroLogix 1100 programmable controller in

direct sunlight. Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight could degrade the LCD

display and have adverse effects on the controller. The controller is not

designed for outdoor use.

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Use only the communication cables that are listed in Table 2 in Class I Division 2 hazardous

locations.

Disconnecting Main Power

The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and maintenance

personnel have quick and easy access to it. In addition to disconnecting electrical power, all

other sources of power (pneumatic and hydraulic) should be de-energized before working on a

machine or process that is controlled by a controller.

Safety Circuits

Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons, like overtravel limit switches, stop push

buttons, and interlocks, should always be hard-wired directly to the master control relay.

These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens, the master control

relay is de-energized, which removes power to the machine. Never alter these circuits to

defeat their function. Serious injury or machine damage could result.

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD

• Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2.

• Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been

switched off.

• Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched

off.

• This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the

product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other

means.

• All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-10(b).

• The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool.

• For applicable equipment (for example, relay modules), exposure to some

chemicals may degrade the sealing properties of the materials that are used

in these devices:

- Relays, epoxy

It is recommended that you periodically inspect these devices for any

degradation of properties and replace the module if degradation is found.

Table 2 - Communication Cables for Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations

Catalog Number Catalog Number

1761-CBL-PM02, series C or later 2707-NC9, series C or later

1761-CBL-HM02, series C or later 1763-NC01, series A or later

1761-CBL-AM00, series C or later —

1761-CBL-AP00, series C or later —

1761-CBL-PH02, series A or later —

1761-CBL-AH02, series A or later —

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD

Do not replace components, connect equipment, or disconnect equipment

unless power has been switched off.

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD

Do not connect or disconnect connectors while the circuit is live.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 17

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Power Distribution

There are some points about power distribution that you should know:

• The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power

to the machine I/O devices when the relay is de-energized. It is recommended that the

controller remains powered even when the master control relay is de-energized.

• If you are using a DC power supply, interrupt the load side rather than the AC line power.

This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn-off. The DC power supply should

be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer. Power to the DC input

and output circuits should be connected through a set of master control relay contacts.

Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit

Any part can fail, including the switches in a master control relay circuit. The failure of one of

these switches would most likely cause an open circuit, which is a safe power-off failure.

However, if one of these switches shorts out, it no longer provides any safety protection.

These switches should be tested periodically to help verify that they stop machine motion

when needed.

Power Considerations The following explains the power considerations for the micro controllers.

Isolation Transformers

Consider using an isolation transformer in the AC line to the controller. This type of

transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system to reduce the electrical

noise that enters the controller and is often used as a step-down transformer to reduce line

voltage. Any transformer that is used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating

for its load. The power rating is expressed in voltamperes (VA).

Power Supply Inrush

During power-up, the MicroLogix 1100 power supply allows a brief inrush current to charge

internal capacitors. Many power lines and control transformers can supply inrush current for a

brief time. If the power source cannot supply this inrush current, the source voltage could sag

momentarily.

The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the MicroLogix 1100 controller is

that the power supply capacitors charge more slowly. However, consider the effect of a

voltage sag on other equipment. For example, a deep voltage sag could reset a computer that

is connected to the same power source. The following considerations determine whether the

power source is required to supply high inrush current:

• The power-up sequence of devices in a system

• The amount of the power source voltage sag if the inrush current cannot be supplied

• The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system

If the entire system is powered-up simultaneously, a brief sag in the power source voltage

typically does not affect any equipment.

Loss of Power Source

The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation

of the system. The time that the system is operational during power loss is called program

scan hold-up time after loss of power. The duration of the power supply hold-up time depends

on the type and state of the I/O, but is typically between 10 milliseconds and 3 seconds. When

the duration of power loss reaches this limit, the power supply signals the processor that it

can no longer provide adequate DC power to the system. This is referred to as a power supply

shutdown. The processor then performs an orderly shutdown of the controller.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Input States on Power Down

The power supply hold-up time that is described previously is longer than the turn-on and

turn-off times of the inputs. Because of this, the input state change from On to Off that occurs

when power is removed could be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts

down the system. Understanding this concept is important. The user program should be

written to take this effect into account.

Other Types of Line Conditions

Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted. It is also possible

that the voltage level drops substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of

time. Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system.

Help Prevent Excessive

Heat

For most applications, normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified

operating range. Confirm that the specified temperature range is maintained. Proper spacing

of components within an enclosure is sufficient for heat dissipation.

In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or

outside the enclosure. In this case, place blower fans inside the enclosure to help with air

circulation and to reduce hot spots near the controller.

Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are

encountered.

Master Control Relay A hard-wired master control relay (MCR) provides a reliable means for emergency machine

shutdown. Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency stop

switches in different locations, its installation is important from a safety standpoint.

Overtravel limit switches or mushroom-head push buttons are wired in series so that when

any of them opens, the master control relay is de-energized. This removes power to input and

output device circuits. See Figure 4

and Figure 5.

Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have

quick and easy access to it. If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure,

place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure, so that you can disconnect

power without opening the enclosure.

Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened, power to input and output devices

should be removed.

When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I/O circuits, power

continues to be provided to the controller’s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the

processor can still be observed.

Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. Place the controller in an enclosure to

protect it from a corrosive atmosphere. Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause

improper operation or damage to components. In extreme cases, you can use air

conditioning to protect against heat build-up within the enclosure.

ATTENTION: Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious

injury and/or machine damage could result.

If you are using an external DC power supply, interrupt the DC output side rather

than the AC line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply

turn-off.

The AC line of the DC output power supply should be fused.

Connect a set of master control relays in series with the DC power supplying the

input and output circuits.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 19

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller. It is intended for

any situation where the operator must quickly de-energize I/O devices only. When inspecting

or installing terminal connections, replacing output fuses, or working on equipment within the

enclosure, use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system.

Emergency Stop Switches

When using emergency stop switches, adhere to the following points:

• Do not program emergency stop switches in the controller program. Any emergency

stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay.

• Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency

stop switches.

• Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system. Verify that

relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application. Emergency stop switches

must be easy to reach.

• In the following illustration, input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection.

However, in most applications, only output circuits require MCR protection.

Figure 4

and Figure 5, show the master control relay that is wired in a grounded system.

Do not control the master control relay with the controller. Provide the operator

with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the

master control relay.

In most applications, input circuits do not require MCR protection; however, if you

must remove power from all field devices, you must include MCR contacts in series

with input power wiring.

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Figure 4 - Schematic (Using IEC Symbols)

Disconnect

Isolation

transformer

Emergency stop

push button

Fuse MCR

230V AC

I/O circuits

Operation of either of these contacts will remove

power from the external I/O circuits, stopping

machine motion.

Fuse

Overtravel limit

switch

MCR

Stop

Start

Line terminals: Connect to terminals of power supply

(1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA)

115V AC or 230V AC

I/O circuits

230V AC

Master Control Relay (MCR)

700-PK400A1

Suppressor

700-N24

MCR

Suppr.

24V DC

I/O circuits

(Lo)

(Hi)

DC power supply

Use IEC 950/EN 60950.

115V AC

or 230V AC

Line terminals: Connect to 24V DC terminals of power supply

(1763-L16BBB, 1763-L16DWD)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 21

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Figure 5 - Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols)

Emergency stop

push button

230V AC

Operation of either of these contacts will remove

power from the external I/O circuits, stopping

machine motion.

Fuse

MCR

Fuse

MCR

Stop

Start

Line terminals: Connect to terminals of power supply

(1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA)

Line terminals: Connect to 24V DC terminals of power supply

(1763-L16BBB, 1763-L16DWD)

230V AC

output

circuits

Disconnect

Isolation

transformer

115V AC or 230V AC

I/O circuits

Master Control Relay (MCR)

700-PK400A1

Suppressor

700-N24

(Lo)

(Hi)

DC power supply. Use NEC

Class 2 for UL Listing.

115V AC

or 230V AC

MCR

24V DC

I/O circuits

Suppr.

Overtravel limit

switch

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Install a Memory Module To install a memory module, do as follows:

1. Remove the memory module port cover.

2. Align the connector on the memory module with the connector pins on the controller.

3. Firmly seat the memory module into the controller.

Using the Battery The MicroLogix 1100 controller is equipped with a replaceable battery (1747-BA). The Battery

Low indicator on the LCD display of the controller shows the status of the replaceable battery.

When the battery is low, the indicator is set (displayed as a solid rectangle). This means that

either the battery wire connector is disconnected, or the battery fails within 2 weeks if it is

connected. When the battery level is acceptable, the indicator is clear (displayed as an empty

rectangle).

MODULE

MEMORY

MODULE

MEMORY

IMPORTANT The MicroLogix 1100 controller ships with the battery wire connector

connected. Ensure that the battery wire connector is inserted into the

connector port if your application needs battery power. For example,

when using a real-time clock (RTC), or to store the program in the

controller's memory for an extended time while the power is removed.

See Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries Installation Instructions,

publication 1747-IN515

, for more information on installation, handling,

usage, storage, and disposal of the battery.

See RTC Battery Operation on page 101

, for more information on the use

of the battery in relation with RTC.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 23

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Connecting the Battery Wire Connector

To connect the battery wire connector to the battery connector, do as follows:

1. Insert the replaceable battery wire connector into the controller’s battery connector.

2. Secure the battery connector wires along the wire guide.

Controller Mounting

Dimensions

Figure 6 - Controller Dimensions

IMPORTANT When the controller’s Battery Low indicator is set (displayed as a solid

rectangle) with the battery wire connector connected, we recommend

strongly to install a new battery immediately.

ESC OK

Wire guide

Battery connector wires

Replaceable battery (1763-BA)

Replaceable battery pocket

Battery wire connector

Battery connector

Dimension 1763-L16AWA 1763-L16BWA 1763-L16BBB 1763-L16DWD

A 90 mm (3.5 in.)

B 110 mm (4.33 in.)

C 87 mm (3.43 in.)

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB, 1763-L16DWD

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Controller and

Expansion I/O Spacing

The controller mounts horizontally, with the expansion I/O extending to the right of the

controller. Allow 50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides of the controller system for adequate

ventilation. Maintain spacing from enclosure walls, wireways, adjacent equipment, and so on,

as shown in Figure 7

Figure 7 - Controller and Expansion I/O Spacing

Mount the Controller MicroLogix 1100 controllers are suitable for use in an industrial environment when installed in

accordance with these instructions. Specifically, this equipment is intended for use in clean,

dry environments (Pollution degree 2

(a)

) and to circuits not exceeding Over Voltage Category

(b)

(IEC 60664-1).

(c)

MicroLogix

1100

1762 I/O

Side Side

Top

Bottom

(a) Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where, normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a

temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation shall be expected.

(b) Over Voltage Category II is the load-level section of the electrical distribution system. At this level transient voltages are

controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the product’s insulation.

ATTENTION: Do not remove the protective debris shield until after the

controller and all other equipment in the panel near the controller are

mounted and wiring is complete. Once the wiring is complete, remove the

protective debris shield. Failure to remove the shield before operating can

cause overheating.

ATTENTION: Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices

inside the controller. Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas.

For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns, use the panel

mounting method that is described in Panel Mounting on page 26

, rather than DIN

rail mounting.

Debris shield

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 25

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

DIN Rail Mounting

The maximum extension of the latch is 14 mm (0.55 in.) in the open position. A flat-blade

screwdriver is required to remove the controller. The controller can be mounted to EN 50022 -

35 x 7.5 or EN 50022 - 35 x 15 DIN rails. DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown in Figure 8

Figure 8 - DIN Rail Mounting Dimensions

To install your controller on the DIN rail, do as follows:

1. Mount your DIN rail. Make sure that the placement of the controller on the DIN rail meets

the recommended spacing requirements. See Controller and Expansion I/O Spacing on

page 24.

2. Close the DIN latch, if it is open.

3. Hook the top slot over the DIN rail.

4. While pressing the controller down against the top of the rail, snap the bottom of the

controller into position.

5. Leave the protective debris shield attached until you are finished wiring the controller

and any other devices.

To remove your controller from the DIN rail:

1. Place a flat-blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom of the controller.

2. Holding the controller, pry downward on the latch until the latch locks in the open

position.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DIN rail latch.

4. Unhook the top of the DIN rail slot from the rail.

27.5 mm

(1.08 in.)

27.5 mm

(1.08 in.)

90 mm

(3.5 in.)

ESC OK

Open

Closed

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Panel Mounting

Mount to panel using #8 or M4 screws. To install your controller using mounting screws:

1. Secure the template to the mounting surface. Make sure that your controller is spaced

properly. See Controller and Expansion I/O Spacing on page 24

2. Drill holes through the template.

3. Remove the mounting template.

4. Mount the controller.

5. Leave the protective debris shield in place until you are finished wiring the controller

and any other devices.

1762 Expansion I/O Module

Dimensions

Figure 9 - 1762 Expansion I/O Module Dimensions

Mounting template

Debris shield

Dimension Expansion I/O Module

A 90 mm (3.5 in.)

B 40 mm (1.57 in.)

C 87 mm (3.43 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 27

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Mount 1762 Expansion I/O

DIN Rail Mounting

The module can be mounted using the following DIN rails:

• 35 x 7.5 mm (EN 50022 - 35 x 7.5)

• 35 x 15 mm (EN 50022 - 35 x 15)

Before mounting the module on a DIN rail, close the DIN rail latch. Press the DIN rail mounting

area of the module against the DIN rail. The latch momentarily opens and locks into place.

Use DIN rail end anchors (Allen-Bradley part number 1492-EA35 or 1492-EAH35) for vibration or

shock environments. Figure 10

shows the location of the end anchors.

Figure 10 - End Anchor Location

Panel Mounting

Use the dimensional template shown in Figure 11 to mount the module. The preferred mounting

method is to use two M4 or #8 panhead screws per module. Mounting screws are required on

every module.

Figure 11 - Dimensional Template

ATTENTION: During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices, be sure that all

debris such as metal chips and wire stands, is kept from falling into the

module. Debris that falls into the module could cause damage when the

module is under power.

1762 expansion I/O must be mounted horizontally as illustrated.

For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns, use the panel

mounting method described below, instead of DIN rail mounting.

End anchor

(3.54)

100

(

3.94)

40.4

(1.59)

40.4

(1.59)

14.5

(0.57)

MicroLogix

1100

1762 I/O

For more than 2 modules: (number of modules - 1) x 40 mm (1.59 in.)

A = 95 mm (3.74 in.)

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB,

1763-L16DWD

All dimensions are in mm (inches).

Hole spacing tolerance: ±0.4 mm (0.016 in.)

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 2 Install Your Controller

Connect Expansion I/O

Modules

The expansion I/O module is attached to the controller or another I/O module by means of a

flat ribbon cable after mounting, as shown in Figure 12.

Figure 12 - Attach Expansion I/O Module

Use the pull loop on the connector to disconnect modules. Do not pull on the

ribbon cable.

You can connect up to four expansion I/O modules to a controller.

ATTENTION: Remove power before removing or inserting an I/O module.

When you remove or insert a module with power applied, an electric arc may

occur. An electric arc can cause personal injury or property damage by:

• Sending an erroneous signal to your system’s field devices, causing the

controller to fault

• Causing an explosion in a hazardous environment

Electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and

its mating connector. Worn contacts may create electrical resistance,

reducing product reliability.

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD

In Class I Division 2 applications, the bus connector must be fully seated and

the bus connector cover must be snapped in place.

In Class I Division 2 applications, all modules must be mounted in direct

contact with each other as shown in Connect Expansion I/O Modules on

page 28. If DIN rail mounting is used, an end emergency stop must be installed

ahead of the controller and after the last 1762 I/O module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 29

Chapter 3

Wire Your Controller

Wiring Requirements Wiring Recommendation

• Allow for at least 50 mm (2 in.) between I/O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the

controller.

• Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring.

Where paths must cross, their intersection should be perpendicular.

• Separate wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics

together.

• Separate input wiring from output wiring.

• Label wiring to all devices in the system. Use tape, shrink-tubing, or other dependable

means for labeling purposes. In addition to labeling, use colored insulation to identify

wiring based on signal characteristics. For example, you may use blue for DC wiring and

red for AC wiring.

Wiring the Terminal Block

The MicroLogix 1100 controllers have screw-cage clamps on the input and output terminal

blocks. With screw-cage clamp terminal blocks, there is no need to attach additional hardware

such as a spade lug to the wire, or use a fingersafe cover.

To wire the terminal block:

1. Strip the end of the wire.

The recommended length for the stripped end of the wire is 11.0 mm (0.44 in.).

2. Insert it into an open clamp.

ATTENTION: Before you install and wire any device, disconnect power to the

controller system.

ATTENTION: Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and

common wire. Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current

allowable for each wire size. Current above the maximum rating may cause

wiring to overheat, which can cause damage.

United States Only: If the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous

environment, all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the

National Electrical Code 501-10 (b).

Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit.

Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed by separate paths.

Table 3 - Wire Requirements

Wire Type

Wire Size (2 wire maximum per terminal screw)

(1)

(1) Wiring torque = 0.56 N•m (5.0 lb•in) rated

1 wire per terminal 2 wires per terminal

Solid Cu 90 °C (194 °F)

0.5…4.0 mm

(12…20 AWG) 0.5…1.5 mm

(16…20 AWG)

Stranded Cu 90 °C (194 °F)

0.5…2.5 mm

(14…20 AWG) 0.5…0.75 mm

(18…20 AWG)

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

3. Using a small screwdriver, tighten the terminal screw. To ensure that the wire

conductor is secured inside the clamp, tighten it to the rated torque, 0.56 N•m

(5.0 lb•in).

The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5.5 mm (0.22 in.).

Use Surge Suppressors Because of the potentially high current surges that occur when switching inductive load

devices, such as motor starters and solenoids, the use of some type of surge suppression to

protect and extend the operating life of the controllers output contacts is required. Switching

inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the life expectancy of relay

contacts. By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device, you

prolong the life of the output or relay contacts. You also reduce the effects of voltage

transients and electrical noise from radiating into adjacent systems.

Figure 13

shows an output with a suppression device. We recommend that you locate the

suppression device as close as possible to the load device.

Figure 13 - Output with Suppression Device Example

If the outputs are DC, we recommend that you use an 1N4004 diode for surge suppression, as

shown in Figure 14. For inductive DC load devices, a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode is

acceptable for most applications. A surge suppressor can also be used. See Table 4

for

recommended suppressors. As shown in Figure 14

, these surge suppression circuits connect

directly across the load device.

Screw-cage clamp terminal block

+DC or L1

Suppression

device

DC COM or L2

AC or DC

outputs

Load

VAC/DC

Out 0

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

Out 4

Out 5

Out 6

Out 7

COM

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 31

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 14 - Relay or Solid-state DC Output with Suppression Device Example

Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive AC load devices include a varistor, an RC

network, or an Allen-Bradley surge suppressor, all shown in Figure 15. These components must

be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular

inductive device. See the table on 32 for recommended suppressors.

Figure 15 - Surge Suppression for Inductive AC Load Devices

+24V DC

IN4004 diode

Relay or solid-state

DC outputs

24V DC common

VAC/DC

Out 0

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

Out 4

Out 5

Out 6

Out 7

COM

(A surge suppressor can

also be used.)

Output device Output deviceOutput device

Varistor

RC network

Surge

suppressor

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Recommended Surge Suppressors

Use the Allen-Bradley surge suppressors shown in Table 4 for use with relays, contactors, and

starters.

Ground the Controller In solid-state control systems, grounding and wire routing helps limit the effects of noise due

to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the ground screw of

the controller to the ground bus prior connecting any devices. Use 2.5 mm

(14 AWG) wire. For

AC-powered controllers, this connection must be made for safety purposes.

This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting surface such as a metal

panel. See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1

, for

additional information. Additional grounding connections from the mounting tab or DIN rail, if

used, are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded.

Table 4 - Recommended Surge Suppressors

Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number

Bulletin 509 Motor Starter

120V AC

240V AC

599-K04

(1)

599-KA04

(1)

(1) Varistor – Not recommended for use on relay outputs.

Bulletin 100 Contactor

120V AC

240V AC

199-FSMA1

(2)

199-FSMA2

(2)

(2) RC Type – Do not use with Triac outputs.

Bulletin 709 Motor Starter 120V AC

1401-N10

(2)

Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays AC coil None required

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

12V DC

199-FSMA9

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

24V DC

199-FSMA9

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

48V DC

199-FSMA9

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

115…125V DC

199-FSMA10

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

230…250V DC

199-FSMA11

Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay 150V max, AC or DC

700-N24

(2)

Miscellaneous electromagnetic devices

limited to 35 sealed VA

150V max, AC or DC

700-N24

(2)

ATTENTION: All devices connected to the RS-232/RS-485 communication port

must be referenced to controller ground, or be floating (not referenced to a

potential other than ground). Failure to follow this procedure may result in

property damage or personal injury.

• For 1763-L16BWA controllers, the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to

chassis ground internally. The 24V DC sensor power source should not be used

to power output circuits. It should only be used to power input devices.

• For 1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD controllers, the VDC NEUT or common

terminal of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally.

Use all four mounting positions for panel mounting installation.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 33

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Wiring Diagrams The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the MicroLogix 1100 controllers.

Controllers with DC inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. Sinking and

sourcing does not apply to AC inputs. See Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams on page 35

The controller terminal block layouts are shown in Terminal Block Layouts on page 33

. The

shading on the labels indicates how the terminals are grouped. A detail of the groupings is

shown in the table following the terminal block layouts.

Terminal Block Layouts

Figure 16 - 1763-L16AWA

ATTENTION: Remove the protective debris strip before applying power to the

controller. Failure to remove the strip may cause the controller to overheat.

ESC OK

Grounding stamping

This symbol denotes a protective earth ground terminal, which provides a low

impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and

provides noise immunity improvement. This connection must be made for safety

purposes on AC-powered controllers.

This symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal, which provides a low

impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for non-safety purposes,

such as noise immunity improvement.

COM

NOT

USED

VAC O/0

VDC

VAC O/1

VDC

VAC O/2

VDC

VAC O/3

VDC

VAC O/4

VDC

VAC O/5

VDC

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

L1 L2/N

100-240 VAC

NOT

USED

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9

Input Terminal Block

Output Terminal Block

Group 1 Group 2

Group 0

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 17 - 1763-L16BWA

Figure 18 - 1763-L16BBB

Figure 19 - 1763-L16DWD

Terminal Groupings

COM-

VAC O/0

VDC

VAC O/1

VDC

VAC O/2

VDC

VAC O/3

VDC

VAC O/4

VDC

VAC O/5

VDC

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

L1 L2/N

100-240 VAC

DC OUT

+ 24V

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9

Input Terminal Block

Output Terminal Block

Group 1 Group 2

Group 0

ATTENTION: The 24V DC sensor supply of the 1763-L16BWA should not be used

to power output circuits. It should only be used to power input devices (for

example, sensors, switches). See Master Control Relay on page 18

for

information on MCR wiring in output circuits.

COM

NOT

USED

VAC O/0

VDC

VAC O/1

VDC

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

DC O/2 O/3

24V+

24V-

O/4 O/5NOT

USED

NOT

USED

+ 24V -

DC IN

NOT

USED

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9

Input Terminal Block

Output Terminal Block

Group 1 Group 2

Group 0

Input Terminal Block

Output Terminal Block

Group 1 Group 2

Group 0

COM

NOT

USED

+ 12/24V -

DC IN

NOT

USED

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9



VAC O/0

VDC

VAC O/1

VDC

VAC O/2

VDC

VAC O/3

VDC

VAC O/4

VDC

VAC O/5

VDC

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

Table 5 - Input Terminal Grouping

Controller

Inputs

Input Group Common Terminal Input Terminal

1763-L16AWA

Group 0 AC COM 0 I/0 through I/3

Group 1 AC COM 1 I/4 through I/9

Group 2 IA COM IV1(+) and IV2(+)

1763-L16BWA

Group 0 DC COM 0 I/0 through I/3

Group 1 DC COM 1 I/4 through I/9

Group 2 IA COM IV1(+) and IV2(+)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 35

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Sinking and Sourcing Wiring

Diagrams

Any of the MicroLogix 1100 controller DC embedded input groups can be configured as sinking

or sourcing depending on how the DC COM is wired on the group.

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB, and 1763-L16DWD Wiring

Diagrams

Figure 20 - 1763-L16AWA Input Wiring Diagram

(1)

(1) “NOT USED” terminals are not intended for use as connection points.

1763-L16BBB

1763-L16DWD

Group 0 DC COM 0 I/0 through I/3

Group 1 DC COM 1 I/4 through I/9

Group 2 IA COM IV1(+) and IV2(+)

Table 6 - Output Terminal Grouping

Controller

Outputs

Output Group Voltage Terminal Output Terminal Description

1763-L16AWA

1763-L16BWA

1763-L16DWD

Group 0 VAC/VDC O/0 Isolated Relay output

Group 1 VAC/VDC O/1 Isolated Relay output

Group 2 VAC/VDC O/2 Isolated Relay output

Group 3 VAC/VDC O/3 Isolated Relay output

Group 4 VAC/VDC O/4 Isolated Relay output

Group 5 VAC/VDC O/5 Isolated Relay output

1763-L16BBB

Group 0 VAC/VDC O/0 Isolated Relay output

Group 1 VAC/VDC O/1 Isolated Relay output

Group 2

DC +24V,

DC -24V

O/2 through O/5 FET output

Table 5 - Input Terminal Grouping (Continued)

Controller

Inputs

Input Group Common Terminal Input Terminal

Type Definition

Sinking Input

The input energizes when a high-level voltage is applied to the input terminal (active high).

Connect the power supply VDC (-) to the input group’s COM terminal.

Sourcing Input

The input energizes when a low-level voltage is applied to the input terminal (active low).

Connect the power supply VDC (+) to the input group’s COM terminal.

ATTENTION: The 24V DC sensor power source must not be used to power

output circuits. It should only be used to power input devices (for example,

sensors, switches). See Master Control Relay on page 16

for information on

MCR wiring in output circuits.

In Figure 20 to Figure 27, lower case alphabetic subscripts are appended to

common-terminal connections to indicate that different power sources may be

used for different isolated groups, if desired.

L1a

L2a

L1b

L2b

L1c

L2c

COM

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 21 - 1763-L16BWA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram

Figure 22 - 1763-L16BWA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram

Figure 23 - 1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD Sinking Input Wiring Diagram

Figure 24 - 1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram

Figure 25 - 1763-L16AWA and 1763-L16BWA Output Wiring Diagram

+DCa

-DCa+DC -DC

+DCb

-DCb

L1c

L2c

COM-

DC OUT

+ 24V

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9

24V DC sensor power

-DCa

+DCa+DC -DC

-DCb

+DCb

L1c

L2c

COM-

DC OUT

+ 24V

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9

24V DC sensor power

+DCa

-DCa

+DCb

-DCb

L1c

L2c

COM

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9

-DCa

+DCa

-DCb

+DCb

L1c

L2c

COM

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

I/1I/0 I/2 I/3

COM

I/4 I/5

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9

+DCa

L2b

-DCa

L1a L1b

L2a

VAC O/0

VDC

VAC O/1

VDC

VAC O/2

VDC

VAC O/3

VDC

VAC O/4

VDC

VAC O/5

VDC

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

L1 L2/N

100-240 VAC

L2d

L1c L1d

L2c

L1e

L2e

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 37

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 26 - 1763-L16BBB Output Wiring Diagram

Figure 27 - 1763-L16DWD Output Wiring Diagram

Controller I/O Wiring Minimizing Electrical Noise

Because of the variety of applications and environments where controllers are installed and

operating, it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by input

filters. To help reduce the effects of environmental noise, install the MicroLogix 1100 system in

a properly rated (for example, NEMA) enclosure. Make sure that the MicroLogix 1100 system is

properly grounded.

A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of

time. We recommend periodically checking system operation, particularly when new

machinery or other noise sources are installed near the MicroLogix 1100 system.

Wire Your Analog Channels Analog input circuits can monitor voltage signals and convert them to serial digital data.

Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines

Consider the following when wiring your analog channels:

• The analog common (COM) is connected to earth ground inside the module. These

terminals are not electrically isolated from the system. They are connected to chassis

ground.

• Analog channels are not isolated from each other.

-DC

+DC

+DCa +DCc

-DCa

+DCb

-DCb

-DCc

VAC O/0

VDC

VAC O/1

VDC

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

DC O/2 O/3

24V+

24V-

O/4 O/5NOT

USED

NOT

USED

+ 24V -

DC IN

+DCa

L2b

-DCa

L1a L1b

L2a

VAC O/0

VDC

VAC O/1

VDC

VAC O/2

VDC

VAC O/3

VDC

VAC O/4

VDC

VAC O/5

VDC

NOT

USED

NOT

USED

L2d

L1c L1d

L2c

L1e

L2e

-DC

+DC

DC IN

-DC

+DC

12/24V

COM

IV1(+) IV2(+)

Sensor 2

(V) voltage

Sensor 1

(V) voltage

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

• Use Belden 8761, or equivalent, shielded wire.

• Under normal conditions, the drain wire (shield) should be connected to the metal

mounting panel (earth ground). Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as

possible.

• To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage-type inputs, limit overall cable impedance by

keeping all analog cables as short as possible. Locate the I/O system as close to your

voltage-type sensors or actuators as possible.

• The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs. Use a power supply that

matches the transmitter specifications as shown in Figure 28

Figure 28 - Sensor/Transmitter Types

Minimize Electrical Noise on Analog Channels

Inputs on analog channels employ digital high-frequency filters that significantly reduce the

effects of electrical noise on input signals. However, because of the variety of applications

and environments where analog controllers are installed and operated, it is impossible to

ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by the input filters.

Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise on

analog signals:

• Install the MicroLogix 1100 system in a properly rated (for example, NEMA) enclosure.

Make sure that the MicroLogix 1100 system is properly grounded.

• Use Belden cable #8761 for wiring the analog channels, making sure that the drain wire

and foil shield are properly earth grounded.

• Route the Belden cable separately from any AC wiring. Additional noise immunity can be

obtained by routing the cables in a grounded conduit.

Ground Your Analog Cable

Use a shielded communication cable (Belden #8761). The Belden cable has two signal wires

(black and clear), one drain wire, and a foil shield. The drain wire and foil shield must be

grounded at one end of the cable.

IV1(+) or IV2(+)

IA COM

IV1(+) or IV2(+)

IA COM

IV1(+) or IV2(+)

IA COM

GND

Transmitter

Supply Signal

Supply

Signal

Controller

Power

supply

3-wire transmitter

4-wire transmitter

2-wire transmitter

Power

supply

Power

supply

Supply Signal

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 39

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Expansion I/O Wiring Digital Wiring Diagrams

Figure 29 to Figure 41 show the digital expansion I/O wiring diagrams.

Figure 29 - 1762-IA8 Wiring Diagram

Figure 30 - 1762-IQ8 Wiring Diagram

IMPORTANT Do not ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the cable.

Foil shield

Black wire

Drain wire

Clear wire

Insulation

IN 7

IN 5

IN 3

IN 1

COM

IN 6

IN 4

IN 2

IN 0

100/120V AC

COM

Commons are

connected internally.

IN 7

IN 5

IN 3

IN 1

COM

IN 6

IN 4

IN 2

IN 0

24V DC

COM

Commons are

connected internally.

-DC (sinking)

+DC (sourcing)

+DC (sinking)

-DC (sourcing)

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 31 - 1762-IQ16 Wiring Diagram

Figure 32 - 1762-IQ32T Wiring Diagram

IN 7

IN 5

IN 3

IN 1

IN 6

IN 4

IN 2

IN 0

24V DC

IN 15

IN 13

IN 11

IN 9

COM 0

IN 14

IN 12

IN 10

IN 8

24V DC

COM 1

+DC (sinking)

-DC (sourcing)

-DC (sinking)

+DC (sourcing)

+DC (sinking)

-DC (sourcing)

-DC (sinking)

+DC (sourcing)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 41

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 33 - 1762-OA8 Wiring Diagram

Figure 34 - 1762-OB8 Wiring Diagram

Figure 35 - 1762-OB16 Wiring Diagram

OUT 5

VAC

OUT 2

OUT 0

OUT 7

OUT 4

OUT 3

OUT 1

VAC

OUT 6

+DC

24V DC (source)

-DC

OUT 6

OUT 4

OUT 2

OUT 0

OUT 7

OUT 5

OUT 3

OUT 1

+VDC

DC COM

OUT 6

OUT 2

OUT 0

OUT 10

OUT 5

OUT 7

OUT 9

OUT 11

OUT 13

OUT 15

OUT 14

OUT 3

OUT 1

VDC+

OUT 8

OUT 12

OUT 4

DC COM

24V DC (source)

+DC

-DC

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 36 - 1762-OB32T Wiring Diagram

Figure 37 - 1762-OV32T Wiring Diagram

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 43

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 38 - 1762-OW8 Wiring Diagram

Figure 39 - 1762-OW16 Wiring Diagram

OUT 5

VAC-VDC2

OUT 2

OUT 0

OUT 7

OUT 4

OUT3

OUT 1

VAC-VDC 1

OUT 6

L1 VAC1 +

L2 DC1 COM

L1 VAC2 +

L2 DC2 COM

OUT 2

OUT 0

OUT 3

OUT 1

VAC-VDC

OUT 6

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 5

OUT 10

OUT 8

OUT 11

OUT 9

VAC-VDC

OUT 14

OUT 12

OUT 15

OUT 13

+DC

-DC

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 40 - 1762-OX6I Wiring Diagram

Figure 41 - 1762-IQ8OW6 Wiring Diagram

L1-0

L1-1

L1-2

L1-3

L1-4

L1-5

OUT0 N.C.

OUT0 N.O.

OUT1 N.C.

OUT1 N.O.

OUT2 N.C.

OUT2 N.O.

OUT3 N.O.

OUT3 N.C.

OUT4 N.C.

OUT4 N.O.

OUT5 N.C.

OUT5 N.O.

L1 OR +DC

L2 OR -DC

IN 6

IN 4

IN 3

IN 1

IN 5

IN 2

IN 0

OUT 4

OUT 2

OUT 0

VAC

VDC

VAC

VDC

COM 1

OUT 3

OUT 1

IN 7

L1 or +DC

-DC (sinking)

+DC (sourcing)

Connected internally

+DC (sinking)

-DC (sourcing)

L2 or -DC

OUT 5

+DC (sinking)

-DC (sourcing)

-DC (sinking)

+DC (sourcing)

COM 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 45

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Analog Wiring

Consider the following when wiring your analog modules:

• The analog common (COM) is not connected to earth ground inside the module. All

terminals are electrically isolated from the system.

• Channels are not isolated from each other.

• Use Belden 8761, or equivalent, shielded wire.

• Under normal conditions, the drain wire (shield) should be connected to the metal

mounting panel (earth ground). Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as

possible.

• To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage-type inputs, limit overall cable impedance by

keeping all analog cables as short as possible. Locate the I/O system as close to your

voltage-type sensors or actuators as possible.

• The module does not provide loop power for analog inputs. Use a power supply that

matches the input transmitter specifications.

1762-IF2OF2 Input Type Selection

Select the input type, current or voltage, using the switches on the module’s circuit board and

the input type/range selection bits in the Configuration Data File. See the MicroLogix 1100

Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

. You can

access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module. Switch 1 controls

channel 0; switch 2 controls channel 1. The factory default setting for both switch 1 and switch

2 is Current. Switch positions are shown in Figure 42

Figure 42 - Select Input Type with the Switches

1762-IF2OF2 Output Type Selection

The output type selection, current or voltage, is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals,

Iout or Vout, and by the type/range selection bits in the Configuration Data File. See the

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication

1763-RM001

ATTENTION: Analog outputs may fluctuate for less than a second when power

is applied or removed. This characteristic is common to most analog outputs.

While the majority of loads will not recognize this short signal, it is

recommended that preventive measures be taken to ensure that connected

equipment is not affected.

Ch0 Ch1

Current (ON) default

Voltage (OFF)

Switch location

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

1762-IF2OF2 Wiring

Figure 43 shows the 1762-IF2OF2 analog expansion I/O terminal block.

Figure 43 - 1762-IF2OF2 Terminal Block Layout

Figure 44 - Differential Sensor Transmitter Types

V Out 1

V Out 0

IN 1 (+)

IN 0 (+)

I Out 1

I Out 0

IN 1 (-)

IN 0 (-)

COM

Commons are connected

internally.

IN 0 (+)

IN 0 (-)

V out 0

V out 1

I out 0

I out 1

COM

IN 1 (-)

IN 1 (+)

COM

Analog sensor

Load

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 47

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 45 - Single-ended Sensor/Transmitter Types

1762-IF4 Input Type Selection

Select the input type, current or voltage, using the switches on the module’s circuit board and

the input type/range selection bits in the Configuration Data File. See the MicroLogix 1100

Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

. You can

access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module.

Figure 46 - 1762-IF4 Switch Positions

IN +

IN -

COM

IN +

IN -

COM

IN +

IN -

COM

Power

supply

(1)

Transmitter

Supply

Signal

Module

2-wire Transmitter

3-wire Transmitter

4-wire Transmitter

Power

supply

(1)

Power

supply

(1)

(1) All power supplies rated N.E.C. Class 2

Supply Signal

Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3

2 1

Current (ON) default

Voltage (OFF)

Switch location

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Figure 47 - 1762-IF4 Terminal Block Layout

Figure 48 - Differential Sensor Transmitter Types

Figure 49 - Sensor/Transmitter Types

(1) All power supplies rated N.E.C. Class 2

Grounding the cable shield at the module end only usually provides sufficient

noise immunity. However, for best cable shield performance, earth ground the

shield at both ends, using a 0.01 µF capacitor at one end to block AC power ground

currents, if necessary.

IN 1 (+)

IN 0 (+)

IN 1 (-)

IN 0 (-)

IN 3 (+)

IN 2 (+)

IN 3 (-)

IN 2 (-)

COM

Commons are connected

internally.

IN 0 (+)

IN 0 (-)

IN 3 (+)

IN 3 (-)

IN 2 (+)

IN 2 (-)

COM

IN 1 (-)

IN 1 (+)

COM

Analog sensor

IN +

IN -

COM

IN +

IN -

COM

IN +

IN -

COM

Power

supply

(1)

Power

supply

(1)

Power

supply

(1)

Transmitter

Module

Supply Signal

Supply

Signal

2-wire Transmitter

3-wire Transmitter

4-wire Transmitter

Supply

Signal

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 49

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

1762-OF4 Output Type Selection

The output type selection, current or voltage, is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals,

Iout or Vout, and by the type/range selection bits in the Configuration Data File.

Figure 50 - 1762-OF4 Terminal Block Layout

Figure 51 - 1762-OF4 Wiring

V out 3

V out 2

V out 1

V out 0

I out 3

I out 2

I out 1

I out 0

COM

Commons are connected

internally.

I out 0

I out 1

V out 2

V out 3

V out 0

V out 1

COM

I out 3

I out 2

COM

Current load

Voltage load

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 51

Chapter 4

Communication Connections

The method that you use and cabling that is required to connect your controller depends on

what type of system you are employing. This chapter also describes how the controller

establishes communication with the appropriate network.

The MicroLogix 1100 controllers provide two communication channels, an isolated

RS-232/RS-485 communication port (Channel 0) and an Ethernet port (Channel 1).

Supported Communication

Protocols

MicroLogix 1100 controllers support the following communication protocols from the primary

RS-232/RS-485 communication channel, Channel 0:

•DH-485

•DF1 Full-duplex

• DF1 Half-duplex master and slave

• DF1 Radio modem

• Modbus RTU master and slave

•ASCII

The Ethernet communication channel, Channel 1, allows your controller to be connected to a

local area network for various devices providing 10 Mbps/100 Mbps transfer rate.

MicroLogix 1100 controllers support CIP explicit messaging (message exchange). MicroLogix

1100 controllers do not support Ethernet I/O master capability through CIP implicit messaging

(real-time I/O messaging).

For more information on MicroLogix 1100 communications, see the MicroLogix 1100

Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

Default Communication

Configuration

The MicroLogix 1100 communication Channel 0 has the following default communication

configuration.

See Use the LCD and Keypad on page 71

for more information about using the LCD Display.

See Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface on page 155

for more information on

communicating.

For Channel 0, the default configuration is present when:

• The controller is powered-up for the first time.

• The Communications Toggle functionality specifies default communications

(Specified using the LCD Display. The DCOMM indicator on the LCD Display is On,

that is, lit in solid rectangle.).

• An OS upgrade is completed.

Table 7 - DF1 Full-duplex Default Configuration Parameters

Parameter Default

Baud Rate 19.2 KBps

Parity None

Source ID (Node Address) 1

Control Line No handshaking

Error Detection CRC

Embedded Responses Auto detect

Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect Enabled

ACK Timeout 50 counts

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Use the Communications

Toggle Functionality

The Communications Toggle functionality can be operated using the LCD display on the

controller, as shown in Figure 52

Use the Communications Toggle functionality to change from the user-defined

communication configuration to the default communications mode and back on Channel 0.

The Default Communications (DCOMM) indicator on the LCD display operates to show when the

controller is in the default communications mode (settings are shown in Table 7

Figure 52 - DCOMM Indicator on LCD Display

Change Communication Configuration

Follow this procedure to change from the user-defined communication configuration to the

default communications mode and back. In this example, we start from the Main Menu screen

of the LCD display. If necessary, press ESC repeatedly until you return to the Main Menu screen.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad. If the menu items are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, scroll down the

screen by pressing the Down key.

NAK retries 3 retries

ENQ retries 3 retries

Stop Bits 1

Data Bits 8

Table 7 - DF1 Full-duplex Default Configuration Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Default

The Communications Toggle functionality only affects the communication

configuration of Channel 0.

COM

COMM1

DCOMM

U-MSG

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 53

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed.

3. Select DCOMM Cfg using the Up and Down keys, then press OK.

4. The DCOMM Configuration screen displays. The current status, Disable in this example,

is selected by default.

The DCOMM status indicator, which is the third of the five indicators at the top left of

the LED display, is displayed as an empty rectangle. It means that the communication

configuration is set to a user-defined communication mode.

COMM0

COMM1

DCOMM

AT.

MSG

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

5. Use the up arrow to change the indicator position so that it points to Enable. Press OK

to change to the default communication mode.

The DCOMM Mode Change Notification screen displays. It indicates that the

communication configuration is changed to the default communication mode. The

DCOMM status indicator displays as a solid rectangle.

If you change to the user-defined configuration from the default configuration mode by

selecting Disable and pressing OK, the DCOMM Mode Change Notification displays.

6. Press ESC to return to the Advanced Settings Menu screen, as shown in step 3

COMM0

COMM

U-MS

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 55

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Connect to the RS-232 Port There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1100 programmable controller to your computer

using the DF1 protocol: using a point-to-point connection or using a modem. Descriptions of

these methods follow.

Make a DF1 Point-to-point Connection

You can connect the MicroLogix 1100 programmable controller to your computer using a serial

cable (1761-CBL-PM02) from your computer’s serial port to the controller’s Channel 0. The

recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full-duplex.

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your computer directly without using an

external optical isolator, such as Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+), catalog number

1761-NET-AIC, as shown in Figure 53

, because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller.

ATTENTION: All devices connected to the RS-232/RS-485 communication port

must be referenced to controller ground, or be floating (not referenced to a

potential other than ground). Failure to follow this procedure may result in

property damage or personal injury.

• For 1763-L16BWA controllers, the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to

chassis ground internally. The 24V DC sensor power source should not be used

to power output circuits. It should only be used to power input devices.

• For 1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD controllers, the VDC NEUT or common

terminal of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally.

Table 8 - Available Communication Cables

Communication Cables Length

1761-CBL-AM00, series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications 45 cm (17.7 in.)

1761-CBL-AP00, series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications 45 cm (17.7 in.)

1761-CBL-PM02, series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications 2 m (6.5 ft.)

1761-CBL-HM02, series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications 2 m (6.5 ft.)

1761-CBL-PH02, series A or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications 2 m (6.5 ft.)

1761-CBL-AH02, series A or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications 2 m (6.5 ft.)

2707-NC9, series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications 15 m (49.2 ft.)

1763-NC01, series A or later 30 cm (11.8 in.)

ATTENTION: UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION

Do not connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to another MicroLogix family

controller such as MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix 1500, or to the

1747-DPS1 network port using a 1761-CBL-AM00 (8-pin mini-DIN to 8-pin mini-

DIN) cable or equivalent.

This type of connection causes damage to the RS-232/RS-485 communication

port (Channel 0) of the MicroLogix 1100 controller and/or the controller itself.

Communication pins that are used for RS-485 communications are alternately

used for 24V power on the other MicroLogix controllers and the 1747-DPS1

network port.

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Figure 53 - Point-to-point Connection

(1) Series C or later cables are required for Class I Division 2 applications.

Use a Modem

You can use modems to connect a computer to one MicroLogix 1100 controller (using DF1 Full-

duplex protocol), to multiple controllers (using DF1 Half-duplex protocol), or Modbus RTU slave

protocol via Channel 0, as shown in Figure 54

. See Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485

Interface on page 145 for information on the types of modems that you can use with the micro

controllers.

Figure 54 - Modem Connection

(1) Series C or later cables are required for Class I Division 2 applications.

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your modem directly without using an external

optical isolator, such as AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, as shown in Figure 54, because

Channel 0 is isolated within the controller.

IMPORTANT Do not attempt to use the DH-485 protocol through modems under any

circumstance. The communication timing using the DH-485 protocol is

not supported by modem communications.

MicroLogix 1100 controller

Channel 0

Computer

1761-CBL-AP00 or

1761-CBL-PM02

(1)

Modem cable (straight-through)

Computer

Modem

MicroLogix 1100 controller

Channel 0

Protocol Options

• DF1 Full-duplex protocol (to 1 controller)

• DF1 Half-duplex protocol (to multiple controllers)

• Modbus RTU slave protocol

1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02

(1)

(straight-through)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 57

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to Modem Cable Pinout

When connecting the MicroLogix 1100 controller Channel 0 to a modem using an RS-232 cable,

the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15.24 m (50 ft.).

Connect to a DF1 Half-duplex Network

Table 9 shows available parameters for a communication port that is configured for DF1 Half-

duplex slave.

ATTENTION: Do not connect pin 1, 8, and 5. This connection causes damage to

the RS-232/RS-485 communication port (channel 0) of the MicroLogix 1100

controller and/or the controller itself.

DTE Device

(MicroLogix 1100

controller

Channel 0)

DCE Device

(Modem, PanelView™,

and so on)

8-pin 25-pin 9-pin

7TXD TXD2 3

4RXD RXD3 2

2GND GND7 5

1B(+) DCD8 1

8A(-) DTR20 4

5N.C. DSR6 6

6CTS CTS5 8

3RTS RTS4 7

Table 9 - DF1 Half-duplex Configuration Parameters

Parameter Options

Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4 Kbps

Parity None, even

Node Address 0...254 decimal

Control Line No handshaking, half-duplex modem (RTS/CTS handshaking, no handshaking (485 network)

Error Detection CRC, BCC

EOT Suppression

Enabled, disabled

When EOT Suppression is enabled, the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued. This saves modem

transmission power and time when there is no message to transmit.

Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect

Enabled, disabled

Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message. Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if

the sender’s Message Retries are not set to 0.

Poll Timeout (x20 ms)

0...65,535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)

Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction. It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a

poll from the master device. If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout, a MSG instruction error is generated,

and the ladder program must requeue the MSG instruction. If you are using a MSG instruction, it is recommended that a Poll

Timeout value of zero not be used. Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero.

RTS Off Delay (x20 ms)

0...65,535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)

Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated. Gives the

modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet.

RTS Send Delay (x20 ms)

0...65,535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)

Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response. For use with modems that are not ready to

respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS.

Message Retries

0...255

Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the

master device. For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission.

Pre Transmit Delay

(x1 ms)

0...65,535 (can be set in 1 ms increments)

When the Control Line is set to no handshaking, this is the delay time before transmission. Required for 1761-NET-AIC physical half-

duplex networks. The 1761-NET-AIC needs a delay time to change from transmit to receive mode.

When the Control Line is set to DF1 Half-duplex Modem, this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a

packet and the RTS assertion.

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

DF1 Half-duplex Master/Slave Network

Use Figure 55 for DF1 Half-duplex master/slave protocol without hardware handshaking.

Figure 55 - DF1 Half-duplex Master/Slave Protocol

(1) DB-9 RS-232 port

(2) mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port

(3) RS-485 port

(4) Series C or later cables are required for Class I Division 2 applications.

DF1 Half-duplex Network (Using PC and Modems)

Figure 56 - DF1 Half-duplex Protocol

(1)

(2)

(3)

SLC 5/03

processor

MicroLogix 1100

controller

MicroLogix 1100

controller

MicroLogix 1100

controller

CH0

1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02

(4)

1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02

(4)

DF1

master

DF1 slave

Straight 9-pin to 25-pin cable

Straight 9-pin

to 25-pin cable

Radio modem or

lease line

Radio

modem or

lease line

RS-485 DF1

Half-duplex

DF1 slave

1763-NC01 (daisy chain) to AIC+

(4)

AIC+

1763-NC01 (daisy chain) to AIC+

(4)

24V DC power (user supplied)

RS-485 DF1

Half-duplex

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

RSLinx® software version 2.0 (or later), SLC™ 5/03,

SLC™ 5/04, SLC 5/05, PLC-5® processor, or

MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, and

MicroLogix 1500 controllers configured for DF1

Half-duplex master. RSLinx software version 2.5 (or

later) is required for MicroLogix 1100 controllers.

DF1 Half-duplex protocol

MicroLogix 1500 controller

with 1764-LSP or 1764-LRP

processor (slave)

SLC 5/03 processor (slave)MicroLogix 1000

controller (slave)

MicroLogix 1500 controller with

1764-LRP processor (slave)

MicroLogix 1100

controller (slave)

Modem

MicroLogix 1200

controller (slave)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 59

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Connecting to a DH-485

Network

The network diagrams on the next pages provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix 1100

controllers to the DH-485 network.

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your DH-485 network directly without using an

external optical isolator, such as MicroLogix and SLC Communication Adapter (1761-NET-AIC),

as shown in Figure 58

, because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller.

Figure 57 - 1761-NC01 MicroLogix Cable

We recommend that you use a 1747-UIC USB interface to connect your computer to a DH-485

network. For more information on the 1747-UIC, see the Universal Serial Bus (USB) to DH-485

Interface Converter Installation Instructions, publication 1747-IN063

DH-485 Configuration Parameters

When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH-485, the following parameters can be

changed:

See Software Considerations on page 150

for tips on setting the parameters listed in Table 10.

Use a 1763-NC01 series A or later (8-pin mini-DIN to 6-pin DH-485 connector) cable

or equivalent to connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a DH-485 network.

Table 10 - DH-485 Configuration Parameters

Parameter Options

Baud Rate 9600, 19.2 KBps

Node Address 1...31 decimal

Token Hold Factor 1...4

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

DH-485 Network with a MicroLogix 1100 Controller

Figure 58 - Connect to a DH-485 Network

A-B

PanelView

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

ESC OK

(2)

AIC+

(1)

(3)

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

ESC OK

AIC+ AIC+ AIC+

AIC+

DH-485 Network

SLC 5/04

PanelView 550

MicroLogix 1500

controller

MicroLogix 1000

controller

MicroLogix 1200

controller

Computer

AIC+

MicroLogix 1100

controller

DH-485 Network

1763-NC01

(4)

Belden shielded twisted-pair cable

1761-CBL-AP00 or

1761-CBL-PM02

1747-CP3 or

1761-CBL-AC00

Port 1 or

port 2 to PC

24V DC (user supplied)

(1) DB-9 RS-232 port

(2) mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port

(3) RS-485 port

(4) Series A or later cables are required.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 61

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Typical 3-node Network (Channel 0 Connection)

Recommended Tools

To connect a DH-485 network to additional devices, you need tools to strip the shielded cable

and to attach the cable to the AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter. We recommend the

following equipment (or equivalent):

DH-485 Communication Cable

The suggested DH-485 communication cable is either Belden #3106A or #9842. The cable is

jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted-wire pairs and a drain wire.

One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is used for a common

reference line between all nodes on the network. The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic

noise from the industrial environment on network communication.

The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together. The

total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m (4000 ft.). However, two segments

can be used to extend the DH-485 network to 2438 m (8000 ft.). For additional information on

connections using the AIC+, see the AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter User Manual,

publication 1761-UM004

When cutting cable segments, make them long enough to route them from one AIC+ to the

next, with sufficient slack to help prevent strain on the connector. Allow enough extra cable to

help prevent chafing and kinking in the cable.

Use these instructions for wiring the Belden #3106A or #9842 cable. See Cable Selection Guide

on page 64 if you are using standard Allen-Bradley cables.)

Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485 Connector

Table 11 - Working with Cables for DH-485 Network

Description Part Number Manufacturer

Shielded twisted-pair cable #3106A or #9842 Belden

Stripping tool Not applicable Not applicable

1/8” slotted screwdriver Not applicable Not applicable

A daisy chained network is recommended. Do not make the incorrect connection

that is shown in Figure 59

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

A-B

PanelView

PanelView 550 terminal

MicroLogix 1100

controller

1761-CBL-AM00

or 1761-CBL-HM02

1747-CP3 or

1761-CBL-AC00

RJ45 port 1761-CBL-AS09

or 1761-CBL-AS03

CH0

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Figure 59 - Connect Communication Cable to DH-485 Connector

Single Cable Connection

When connecting a single cable to the DH-485 connector, use Figure 60.

Figure 60 - Single Cable Connection

Multiple Cable Connections

When connecting multiple cables to the DH-485 connector, use Figure 61.

Figure 61 - Multiple Cable Connections

Table 12 - Connections using Belden #3106A Cable

For this Wire/Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal

Shield/drain Non-jacketed Terminal 2 - Shield

Blue Blue Terminal 3 - (Common)

White/orange

White with orange stripe Terminal 4 - (Data B)

Orange with white stripe Terminal 5 - (Data A)

Table 13 - Connections using Belden #9842 Cable

For this Wire/Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal

Shield/drain Non-jacketed Terminal 2 - Shield

Blue/white

White with blue stripe

Cut back - no connection

(1)

(1) To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable, cut back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after

the insulation jacket is removed. This wire is not used by DH-485.

Blue with white stripe Terminal 3 - (Common)

White/orange

White with orange stripe Terminal 4 - (Data B)

Orange with white stripe Terminal 5 - (Data A)

Belden #3106A or

#9842

Belden #3106A or

#9842

Belden #3106A or

#9842

Connector

Incorrect

White with orange stripes

Shrink tubing recommended Blue (#3106A) or

Blue with white

stripes (#9842)

Drain wire

6 Termination

5 A

4 B

3 Common

2 Shield

1 Chassis ground

Orange with white stripes

To next device

To previous device

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 63

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Ground and Terminate the DH-485 Network

Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 jumpered together. This

provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable.

Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together, as shown in

Figure 62

. This connects the termination impedance (of 120 Ω) that is built into each AIC+ or

the 1763-NC01 cable as required by the DH-485 specification.

Figure 62 - End-of-Line Termination

MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to DH-485 Communication Cable Pinout

When connecting the MicroLogix 1100 controller Channel 0 to a DH-485 communication cable

pinout using an RS-232 cable, the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15.24 m

(50 ft.). See Figure 63

Figure 63 - DH-485 Communications Cable Pinout

Connect the AIC+ You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a DH-485 network via Channel 0 directly

without using an optical isolator, such as AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, because Channel

0 is isolated. However, you must use an AIC+ to connect your computer or other MicroLogix

family products, such as MicroLogix 1200 controllers, to a DH-485 network.

Figure 64

shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the AIC+.

Jumper Jumper

Belden #3106A or #9842 cable

1219 m (4000 ft.) max

Jumper

DTE Device

(MicroLogix 1100

controller

Channel 0)

DCE Device

(DH-485 connector)

8-pin 6-pin

7TXD 6Termination

4RXD 5A

2GND 4B

1B(+) 3Common

8A(-) 2Shield

5 N.C. 1 Chassis Ground

6CTS

3RTS

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Figure 64 - AIC+ External Wiring Connections

For additional information on connecting the AIC+, see the AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter

User Manual, publication 1761-UM004

Cable Selection Guide

Item Description

1 Port 1 - DB-9 RS-232, DTE

2 Port 3 - RS-485 Phoenix plug

3 Port 2 - mini-DIN 8 RS-232 DTE

DC Power source selector switch

(Cable = Port 2 power source, External = External power source connected to item 5)

5 Terminals for external 24V DC power supply and chassis ground

AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter

(1761-NET-AIC)

1761-CBL-PM02

(2)

1761-CBL-AP00

(2)

1761-CBL-PH02

Cable Length Connections from to AIC+

External Power

Supply Required

(1)

Power Selection

Switch Setting

(1)

1761-CBL-AP00

(2)

1761-CBL-PM02

(2)

1761-CBL-PH02

45 cm (17.7 in.)

2 m (6.5 ft.)

SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, ch 0 Port 2 Yes External

MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 controllers, ch 0 Port 1 Yes External

MicroLogix 1100 controller, ch 0 Port 1 Yes External

PanelView 550 terminal through NULL modem adapter Port 2 Yes External

DTAM™ Plus / DTAM™ Micro Port 2 Yes External

PC COM port Port 2 Yes External

(1) An external power supply is required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device that is connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.

(2) Series C or later cables are required.

1761-CBL-HM02

(2)

1761-CBL-AM00

(2)

1761-CBL-AH02

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 65

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

1761-CBL-PM02 Series C (or equivalent) Cable Wiring Diagram

Cable Length Connections from to AIC+

External Power

Supply Required

(1)

Power Selection

Switch Setting

1761-CBL-AM00

(2)

1761-CBL-HM02

(2)

1761-CBL-AH02

45 cm (17.7 in.)

2 m (6.5 ft.)

MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 controllers, ch 0 Port 2 No Cable

MicroLogix 1100 controller, ch 0 Port 2 Yes External

To port 2 on another AIC+ Port 2 Yes External

(1) An external power supply is required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device that is connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.

(2) Series C or later cables are required.

1761-CBL-AC00

(2)

1747-CP3

Cable Length Connections from to AIC+

External Power

Supply Required

(1)

Power Selection

Switch Setting

(1)

1747-CP3

1761-CBL-AC00

(2)

3 m (9.8 ft.)

45 cm (17.7 in.)

SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processor, ch 0 Port 1 Yes External

PC COM port Port 1 Yes External

PanelView 550 terminal through NULL modem adapter Port 1 Yes External

DTAM Plus / DTAM Micro Port 1 Yes External

Port 1 on another AIC+ Port 1 Yes External

(1) An external power supply is required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device that is connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.

(2) Series C or later cables are required.

User-supplied cable

Cable Length Connections from to AIC+

External Power

Supply Required

(1)

Power Selection

Switch Setting

(1)

Straight 9-pin to 25-pin — Modem or other communication device Port 1 Yes External

(1) An external power supply is required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device that is connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.

1761-CBL-AS03

1761-CBL-AS09

Cable Length Connections from to AIC+

External Power

Supply Required

(1)

Power Selection

Switch Setting

(1)

1761-CBL-AS03

1761-CBL-AS09

3 m (9.8 ft.)

9.5 m (31.17 ft.)

SLC™ 500 Fixed,

SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 processors

Port 3 Yes External

PanelView 550 terminal RJ45 port Port 3 Yes External

(1) An external power supply is required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device that is connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Recommended User-supplied Components

These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier.

Figure 65 - Port Pinout

Table 14 - User-supplied Components

Component Recommended Model

External power supply and chassis ground Power supply rated for 20.4...28.8V DC

NULL modem adapter Standard AT

Straight 9-pin to 25-pin RS-232 cable

See Figure 65

and Table 15 for port information if

making your own cables.

Table 15 - Cable Assignment

Pin Port 1: DB-9 RS-232

Port 2

(1)

: 1761-CBL-PM02 cable

(1) An 8-pin mini-DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2. This connector is not commercially available. If you

are making a cable to connect to port 2, you must configure your cable to connect to the Allen-Bradley cable shown in

Figure 65

Port 3: RS-485 Connector

1 Received line signal detector (DCD) 24V DC Chassis ground

2 Received data (RxD) Ground (GND) Cable shield

3 Transmitted data (TxD) Request to send (RTS) Signal ground

DTE ready (DTR)

(2)

(2) On port 1, pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6. Whenever the AIC+ is powered on, pin 4 matches the state of pin 6.

Received data (RxD)

(3)

(3) In the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable, pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB-9 connector.

DH-485 data B

5 Signal common (GND) Received line signal detector (DCD) DH-485 data A

DCE ready (DSR)

(2)

Clear to send (CTS)

(3)

Termination

7 Request to send (RTS) Transmitted data (TxD) Not applicable

8 Clear to send (CTS) Ground (GND) Not applicable

9 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

Programming device Controller

9-pin D-shell 8-pin mini-DIN

9RI 24V1

8CTS GND2

7RTS RTS3

6DSR RXD4

5GND DCD5

4DTR CTS6

3TXD TXD7

2RXD GND8

1DCD

1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02

DB-9 RS-232

RS-485 connector

Cable straight D connector

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

876

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 67

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Safety Considerations

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, or non-hazardous

locations only.

See Safety Considerations on page 15

for additional information.

Install and Attach the AIC+

1. Take care when installing the AIC+ in an enclosure so that the cable connecting the

MicroLogix controller to the AIC+ does not interfere with the enclosure door.

2. Carefully plug the terminal block into the RS-485 port on the AIC+ you are putting on the

network. Allow enough cable slack to help prevent stress on the plug.

3. Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal block. This

guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires.

Power the AIC+

MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, and MicroLogix 1500 programmable controllers support 24V

DC communication power on Channel 0. When connected to the 8-pin mini-DIN connector on

the 1761-NET-AIC, 1761-NET-ENI, and the 1761-NET-ENIW, these controllers provide the power

for the interface converter modules.

The MicroLogix 1100 controller does not provide 24V DC communication power. Instead these

pins are used to provide RS-485 communications directly. Any AIC+, ENI, or ENIW not

connected to a MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, or MicroLogix 1500 controller requires a 24V

DC power supply.

If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC+, the power selection switch

determines what device powers the AIC+.

Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connecting the power supply to

the AIC+. Figure 66

shows where to connect external power for the AIC+.

Figure 66 - External Power for AIC+

ATTENTION: EXPLOSION HAZARD

AIC+ must be operated from an external power source.

This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the

product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other

means.

ATTENTION: If you use an external power supply, it must be 24V DC

(-15%/+20%). Permanent damage results if a higher voltage supply is used.

24V

NEUT

CHS

GND

Bottom view

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Power Options

There are two options for powering the AIC+:

• Use the 24V DC user power supply built into the MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, or

MicroLogix 1500 controller. The AIC+ is powered through a hard-wired connection using

a communication cable (1761-CBL-HM02, or equivalent) connected to port 2.

• Use an external DC power supply with the following specifications:

- Operating voltage: 24V DC (-15%/+20%)

- Output current: 150 mA minimum

- Rated NEC Class 2

Make a hard-wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the

bottom of the AIC+.

Connecting to Ethernet You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to an Ethernet network via the Ethernet port

(Channel 1). You do not need to use an Ethernet interface card, such as the Ethernet Interface

(ENI) and (ENIW), 1761-NET-ENI and 1761-NET-ENIW, to connect your MicroLogix 1100 controller

to an Ethernet network. For additional information on connecting to an Ethernet network, see

Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface on page 155

Ethernet Connections

The Ethernet connector, Channel 1, is an RJ45, 10/100 Base-T connector. The pinout for the

connector is shown in Table 16

ATTENTION: Always connect the CHS GND (chassis ground) terminal to the

nearest earth ground. This connection must be made whether or not an

external 24V DC supply is used.

ATTENTION: If you use an external power supply, it must be 24V DC

(-15%/+20%). Permanent damage results if miswired with the wrong power

source.

Table 16 - RJ45 Connector Pinout

Pin Pin Name

1Tx+

2Tx-

3Rx+

4 Not used by 10/100Base-T

5 Not used by 10/100Base-T

6Rx-

7 Not used by 10/100Base-T

8 Not used by 10/100Base-T

RS-232/RS-485 port (Channel 0)

Ethernet port (Channel 1)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 69

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

When to use straight-through and cross-over cable:

• MicroLogix 1100 controller Ethernet port to 10/100 Base-T Ethernet switch cables uses a

straight-through pinout (1-1, 2-2, 3-3, 6-6).

• Direct point-to-point 10/100 Base-T cables connecting the MicroLogix 1100 controller

Ethernet port directly to another Ethernet port (or a computer 10/100Base-T port)

require a cross-over pinout (1-3, 2-6, 3-1, 6-2).

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

End view of RJ45 plug Looking into an RJ45 jack

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 4 Communication Connections

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 71

Chapter 5

Use the LCD and Keypad

The LCD and keypad are shown in Figure 67.

Figure 67 - Controller LCD and Keypad

Table 17 - LCD and Keypad

Feature Description

1LCD

LCD screen keypad

(ESC, OK, Up, Down, Left, and Right buttons)

ESC OK

Top view

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Operating Principles Figure 68 - MicroLogix 1100 LCD Menu Structure Tree

Startup Screen

The Startup screen displays whenever the controller is powered up.

Figure 69 - LCD Default Startup Screen

You can customize this Startup screen in your application program by defining a string data

file that contains the string to display on the Startup screen and specifying the CBS element of

the LCD Function File to the address of this string file.

Figure 70

shows an example of a customized Startup screen.

Startup Screen

User Defined?

Yes

Integer

Bit

KeyIn Mode

DCOMM Cfg

ENET Cfg

TrimPot Set

System Info

Mode Switch

Monitoring

I/O Status

Advance Set

User Displ

Main Menu

The ESC key is held down more than 3 s.

Fault Code

User Defined Menu

LCD Instruction Interface

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 73

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Figure 70 - Customized Startup Screen Example

For more information on how to create and use a customized Startup screen, see the LCD

Function File described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set

Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

After the default Startup screen or your customized Startup screen is displayed for 3 seconds,

either the default screen (the I/O Status screen) is displayed by default, or a user-defined

screen is displayed if your application uses a custom default screen.

Main Menu and Default Screen

The Main menu consists of five menu items: I/O Status, Monitoring, Mode Switch, User Displ,

and Advance Set.

Figure 71 - LCD Main Menu

Table 18 - Main Menu Items

Menu Item Description For details, see

I/O Status

Displays the I/O Status screen, which shows the I/O status of the embedded

digital I/O.

I/O Status on page 76

Monitoring Allows you to view and change the data value of a bit and an integer file.

Monitor Bit File on page 77

Monitor Integer File on page 82

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Figure 72 - LCD Default Screen - I/O Status Screen

Figure 72 is the default screen of the display, allowing you to monitor the controller and I/O

Status. For more information on the I/O Status screen, see I/O Status on page 76.

Operating Buttons

Using Menus to Choose Values

Mode Switch Allows you to change the mode switch selection. Use the Mode Switch on page 88

User Displ Displays the user-defined LCD screen Use a User-defined LCD Screen on page 90

Advance Set

Allows you to configure or view the following:

• Change the key in mode for value entry for a trimpot.

• Use the Communications Toggle functionality.

• View the Ethernet port configuration.

• Change the data value of trimpots.

• View system information, such as OS series and firmware revision.

• Change Key In Mode on page 92

• Communications Toggle Functionality on page 94

• Ethernet Port Configuration on page 95

• Trimpots on page 96

• I/O Status on page 76

Table 18 - Main Menu Items (Continued)

Menu Item Description For details, see

Button Function

Cursor Buttons

Move cursor

Select menu item

Choose file numbers, values, and so on

OK Next menu level, store your entry, apply the changes

ESC Previous menu level, cancel your entry

Press To

• Go to the next menu level.

• Store your entry.

• Apply the changes.

• Go to the previous menu level.

• Cancel your entry since the last Ok.

• Press repeatedly to go to the main menu.

• Change menu item.

•Change value.

• Change position.

COM

COMM

DCOMM

U-MSG

ESC OK

ESC

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 75

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Select Between Menu Items

Cursor Display

Cursor up or down

Apply or Enter

The symbol " " is used as the cursor.

There are two different cursor types:

Selection cursor (the symbol “ ”) is displayed left to the

selected item.

• Move the cursor with the up/down arrows

Full block navigation is shown as a flashing block:

• Change position with left/right arrows

• Change values with up/down arrows

Flashing value is presented as an empty rectangle for explanation purpose.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Setting Values

I/O Status The MicroLogix 1100 controller provides I/O status indicators on the LCD screen. You can view

the status of inputs and outputs on the I/O Status screen on the LCD, as shown in Figure 73

The I/O status indicators on this screen are updated every 100 ms to reflect the current I/O

status in real time, regardless of controller scan time.

Figure 73 - I/O Status Screen

A solid rectangle displays when the input or output is energized. An empty rectangle displays

when the input or output is not energized.

ESC

Change value = Up/down arrows

Move cursor between digits = Left/right arrows

Stores entries

Retain previous value

Left/right arrow moves the cursor between the digits of the value (+02714).

Up/down arrow = Changes the value

Up arrow = Increment

Down arrow = Decrement

IMPORTANT If no user-defined LCD screen is used, the I/O Status screen displays:

• 5 seconds after the controller has powered-up

• When the user enters the I/O Status screen from other screen using the

LCD menu. If you are at the other screen and want to view I/O status,

you have to enter the I/O Status screen manually using the menu.

Otherwise, the current screen is displayed continuously.

COMM

DCOMM

AT.

U-

6 output status indicators

10 input status indicators

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 77

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

View I/O Status

Follow these steps to view the status of inputs and outputs on the LCD.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select I/O Status by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The I/O Status screen displays.

3. If you have finished viewing I/O status, press ESC to return to the Main Menu screen, as

shown in step 1

Monitor Bit File The LCD allows you to view and change the data values of 48 bits in a user-defined file. You

can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD.

To monitor the bit file on the LCD, you have to specify its file number in the Target Bit File

Number (TBF) element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to the

controller. The TBF element can only be changed by a program download.

Target Bit File Number (TBF)

IMPORTANT If a user-defined LCD screen is used, the I/O Status screen displays:

• When the user holds down the ESC key for more than 3 seconds

• When time out is enabled, that is, the timeout period is set to a positive

value, and the timeout period is passed. You can enable and disable

timeout and set the timeout period using the TO element in the LCD

Function File. For more information, see the LCD Function File that is

described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction

Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

• If time out is disabled, that is, the timeout period is set to zero, and a

custom LCD screen is displayed, it is displayed continuously until the

user gives an input to change to other screen. For more information,

Use a User-defined LCD Screen on page 90

Feature Address Data Format Type

User Program

Access

Target Bit File Number LCD:0.TBF Word (INT) Control Read-only

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

The value that is stored in the TBF element identifies the bit file with which the LCD interfaces.

Valid bit files are B3, and B10 through B255. When the LCD reads a valid bit file number, it can

access up to the first 48 bits (0...47) of the specified file on the LCD screen. The next 48 bits in

the target bit file (48...95) are used to define the read-only or read/write privileges for the first

48 bits.

The only bit file that the LCD interfaces with is the file that is specified in the TBF element.

Table 19

shows an example of how the LCD uses the configuration information with bit file

number 3 (LCD:0.TBF=3).

The bit number that is displayed on the LCD corresponds to the data address as illustrated in

the table. The protection bit defines whether the data is editable or read-only. When the

protection bit is set (1), the corresponding data address is considered read-only by the LCD.

The “Protected!” message is displayed whenever a read-only element is active on the LCD.

When the protection bit is clear (0) or the protection bit does not exist, no additional message

is displayed and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the LCD keypad.

IMPORTANT Use your programming software to verify that the bit file you specify in

the TBF element, and the appropriate number of elements, exist in the

MicroLogix 1100 user program.

Table 19 - Bit File Number 3 Example

Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit

0 B3:0/0 B3:3/0 16 B3:1/0 B3:4/0 32 B3:2/0 B3:5/0

1 B3:0/1 B3:3/1 17 B3:1/1 B3:4/1 33 B3:2/1 B3:5/1

2 B3:0/2 B3:3/2 18 B3:1/2 B3:4/2 34 B3:2/2 B3:5/2

3 B3:0/3 B3:3/3 19 B3:1/3 B3:4/3 35 B3:2/3 B3:5/3

4 B3:0/4 B3:3/4 20 B3:1/4 B3:4/4 36 B3:2/4 B3:5/4

5 B3:0/5 B3:3/5 21 B3:1/5 B3:4/5 37 B3:2/5 B3:5/5

6 B3:0/6 B3:3/6 22 B3:1/6 B3:4/6 38 B3:2/6 B3:5/6

7 B3:0/7 B3:3/7 23 B3:1/7 B3:4/7 39 B3:2/7 B3:5/7

8 B3:0/8 B3:3/8 24 B3:1/8 B3:4/8 40 B3:2/8 B3:5/8

9 B3:0/9 B3:3/9 25 B3:1/9 B3:4/9 41 B3:2/9 B3:5/9

10 B3:0/10 B3:3/10 26 B3:1/10 B3:4/10 42 B3:2/10 B3:5/10

11 B3:0/11 B3:3/11 27 B3:1/11 B3:4/11 43 B3:2/11 B3:5/11

12 B3:0/12 B3:3/12 28 B3:1/12 B3:4/12 44 B3:2/12 B3:5/12

13 B3:0/13 B3:3/13 29 B3:1/13 B3:4/13 45 B3:2/13 B3:5/13

14 B3:0/14 B3:3/14 30 B3:1/14 B3:4/14 46 B3:2/14 B3:5/14

15 B3:0/15 B3:3/15 31 B3:1/15 B3:4/15 47 B3:2/15 B3:5/15

IMPORTANT Although the LCD does not allow protected data to be changed from its

keypad, the control program or other communication devices do have

access to this data. Protection bits only provide LCD write protection.

They do not provide any overwrite protection to data from ladder logic,

HMI, or programming software. It is the users' responsibility to verify

that data is not inadvertently overwritten.

• Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions

(addresses B3:6/0 and above, in this example).

• The LCD always starts at bit 0 of a data file. It cannot start at any other address

within the file.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 79

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Monitor a Bit File

For the explanations in this section, we assume the followings in the application program:

• A bit file B3, which is 7 elements long (7 words = 112 bits), is defined with the preset data,

as shown in Figure 74

Figure 74 - File B3 Data

• The TBF element of the LCD Function File is set to 3 to specify the bit file B3 as the

target bit file to monitor on the LCD, as shown in Figure 75.

Figure 75 - LCD Function File

• The controller mode is set to Remote Run.

Data bits (first 48 bits), which are monitored on

the LCD and maskable by protection bits

Protection bits (second 48 bits)

Data bits (after the first 96 bits), which are not

monitored on the LCD and not maskable by

protection bits

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the bit file B3.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Bit/Integer File Select screen displays.

3. If Bit is selected, as shown in step 2

, press OK .

If not selected, press the Up or Down key to select it, and then press OK.

4. The current data value (ON) of the B3:0/0 bit is displayed. Note that “0/0” flashes, which

means the cursor is at the target bit position.

5. To change the data value of the B3:0/0 bit to OFF (0):

First, press OK to select the displayed address and move the cursor to the data value

position. Then, “ON” flashes, which means the cursor is at the data value position.

6. Press the Down key. Then, the data value is represented as “OFF”. Note that “OFF”

continues to flash, which means the cursor is still at the data value position.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 81

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

7. Press OK to apply the changes. Then, the new value OFF (0) is applied. The target bit,

“0/0” in this example, flashes. The cursor is moved automatically to the target bit

position.

You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500

programming software.

8. Now, we view an example of the data value of a protected bit, B3:0/2. Press the Up key

twice. Then, the target bit changes to “0/2” and its data value is displayed with the

“Protected!” message. Because the B3:3/2 is set (1), the B3:0/2 bit is a protected bit.

9. Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing OK. Because the B3:0/2 bit

is a protected bit, you find that the cursor does not move to the data value position.

When the cursor is at the data value position, press the Down key to change the

data value of a bit from ON (1) to OFF (0). Press the Up key to change from OFF (0)

to ON (1).

After changing the data value of a target bit, press OK to apply the changes or

press ESC to discard the changes.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

10. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the B3:0/3 bit. Because the B3:0/3 bit is

not a protected bit, only its data value, OFF (0) in this example, displays without the

“Protected!” message.

11. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the B3:0/4 bit. You find that the B3:0/3

bit is a protected bit and its data value is ON (1).

12. Hold down the Up key until the target bit becomes “2/15”.

Press the Up key again, and you find the target bit does not change to “3/0”. It is

because the maximum range of bits you can monitor with the LCD is the first 48 bits (3

words) of the specified target bit file.

13. Try to press the Up and Down keys to change the target bit to another bit. Try to change

its data value using the OK, Up and Down keys.

14. If you have finished monitoring the bit file, B3, press ESC to return to the Bit/Integer File

Select screen, as shown in step 2

Monitor Integer File The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of an integer file. You can access to this

functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD.

To monitor an integer file on the LCD, you have to specify its file number in the Target Integer

File Number (TIF) element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to

the controller. The TIF element can only be changed by a program download.

Target Integer File Number (TIF)

The value that is stored in the TIF element identifies the integer file with which the LCD

interfaces. The LCD can read or write to any valid integer file within the controller. Valid

integer files are N3 through N255. When the LCD reads a valid integer file number, it can

access up to the first 48 elements (words 0…47) of the specified file on the LCD screen. The

next 48 bits (words 48…50) are used to define the read-only or read/write privileges for the

first 48 elements.

The only integer file that the LCD interfaces with is the file that is specified in the TIF element.

Table 20

shows an example of how the LCD uses the configuration information with integer file

number 7 (LCD:0.TIF=7).

IMPORTANT The maximum range of bits you can monitor with the Bit File Monitoring

functionality on the LCD is the first 48 bits (3 words).

Feature Address Data Format Type

User Program

Access

Target Integer File Number LCD:0.TIF Word (INT) Control Read-only

IMPORTANT The maximum range of bits you can monitor with the Bit File Monitoring

functionality on the LCD is the first 48 bits (3 words).

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 83

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

The element number that is displayed on the LCD corresponds to the data address as

illustrated in the table. The protection bit defines whether the data is editable or read-only.

When the protection bit is set (1), the corresponding data address is considered read-only by

the LCD. The “Protected!” message is displayed whenever a read-only element is active on the

LCD. When the protection bit is clear (0) or the protection bit does not exist, no additional

message is displayed and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the LCD

keypad.

Monitor an Integer File

For the explanations in this section, we assume the following in the application program:

• An integer file N7, which is 53 elements long (53 words), is defined with the preset data,

as shown in Figure 76

Table 20 - Integer File Number 7 Example

Element Number Data Address Protection Bit Element Number Data Address Protection Bit Element Number Data Address Protection Bit

0 N7:0 N7:48/0 16 N7:16 N7:49/0 32 N7:32 N7:50/0

1 N7:1 N7:48/1 17 N7:17 N7:49/1 33 N7:33 N7:50/1

2 N7:2 N7:48/2 18 N7:18 N7:49/2 34 N7:34 N7:50/2

3 N7:3 N7:48/3 19 N7:19 N7:49/3 35 N7:35 N7:50/3

4 N7:4 N7:48/4 20 N7:20 N7:49/4 36 N7:36 N7:50/4

5 N7:5 N7:48/5 21 N7:21 N7:49/5 37 N7:37 N7:50/5

6 N7:6 N7:48/6 22 N7:22 N7:49/6 38 N7:38 N7:50/6

7 N7:7 N7:48/7 23 N7:23 N7:49/7 39 N7:39 N7:50/7

8 N7:8 N7:48/8 24 N7:24 N7:49/8 40 N7:40 N7:50/8

9 N7:9 N7:48/9 25 N7:25 N7:49/9 41 N7:41 N7:50/9

10 N7:10 N7:48/10 26 N7:26 N7:49/10 42 N7:42 N7:50/10

11 N7:11 N7:48/11 27 N7:27 N7:49/11 43 N7:43 N7:50/11

12 N7:12 N7:48/12 28 N7:28 N7:49/12 44 N7:44 N7:50/12

13 N7:13 N7:48/13 29 N7:29 N7:49/13 45 N7:45 N7:50/13

14 N7:14 N7:48/14 30 N7:30 N7:49/14 46 N7:46 N7:50/14

15 N7:15 N7:48/15 31 N7:31 N7:49/15 47 N7:47 N7:50/15

IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad, the

control program or other communication devices have access to

protected data. Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection

to data within the target integer file. It is entirely the user’s

responsibility to verify that data is not inadvertently overwritten.

• Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions

(addresses N7:51 and above, in this example).

• The LCD always starts at word 0 of a data file. It cannot start at any other address

within the file.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Figure 76 - Data File N7

• The TIF element of the LCD Function File is set to 7 to specify the integer file N7 as the

target integer file to monitor on the LCD, as shown in Figure 77.

Figure 77 - LCD Function File

• The controller mode is set to Remote Run.

Data words (first 48 words), which are

monitored on the LCD and maskable by

protection bits

Protection bits (second 48 bits = 3 words) Data words (after the first 51 words), which are not

monitored on the LCD and not maskable by

protection bits

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 85

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the integer file N7.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Bit/Integer File Select screen displays.

3. If Integer is selected, as shown in step 2, press OK.

If not selected, press the Down key to select it, then press OK.

4. The current data value (ON) of the N7:0 word displays. The target word “0”, which is right

to “N7:”, flashes, which means the cursor is at the target word position.

5. We change the data value of the N7:0 word to the negative decimal value -1300. First,

press OK to move the cursor to the data value position. Then, the last digit of “+00000”

flashes, which means the cursor is at the data value position.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

6. Press the Left key twice. Then, the cursor positions at the third digit. Press the Up key

three times to change the third digit to 3.

7. Press the Left key once. Then, press the Up key once. The second digit changes to “1”.

Note that “1” still flashes, which means the cursor is still at the data value position.

8. Press the Left key once. Then, press the Down key once. The sign digit changes to “-”.

Note that “-” is still flashing, which means the cursor is still at the data value position.

9. Press OK to apply the changes. Then, the new value -1300 is applied. The target word

“0”, which is right to “N7:”, flashes. The cursor is moved automatically to the target word

position.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 87

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

You can identify that this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500

programming software.

10. Now, we view the data value of a protected word N7:1.

Press the Up key once. Then, the target word changes to “1” and its data value displays

with the “Protected!” message. Because the N7:48/1 bit is set (1), the N7:1 word is a

protected word.

11. Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing OK. Because the N7:1 word

is protected, you find that the cursor does not move to the data value position.

12. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the N7:2 word. Because the N7:2 word is

not protected, only its data value, 0 in this example, is displayed without the

“Protected!” message.

13. Hold down the Up key until the target word becomes “47”.

Press the Up key again, and you find the target word does not change to “48”. It is

because the maximum range of words you can monitor with the LCD is the first 48

words of the specified target integer file.

After changing the data value of a target word, press OK to apply the changes or

press ESC to discard the changes.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

14. Try to press the Up and Down keys to change the target word to another word. Try to

change its data value using the OK, Up, Down, Right and Left keys.

15. If you have finished monitoring the integer file N7, press ESC to return to the Main Menu

screen, as shown in step 2

Use the Mode Switch The MicroLogix 1100 controller provides the controller mode switch on the LCD. The possible

positions of the mode switch are PROGRAM, REMOTE, and RUN. You can change mode switch

position using the Mode Switch screen on the LCD. In this example, the mode switch position is

set to REMOTE.

All built-in LCD screens except the Boot Message screen display the current mode switch

position, at their top-right portion. In this example, the mode switch position is set to RUN.

Controller Modes

Table 21 shows the possible controller modes when the mode switch positions at PROGRAM,

REMOTE, or RUN. For example, if the Mode Switch is at RUN and you want to test a control

program with running it for one scan, you have to first change the mode switch position to

REMOTE before you run the control program in the Remote Test single scan mode with your

RSLogix 500 programming software.

IMPORTANT The maximum range of words you can monitor with the Integer File

Monitoring functionality on the LCD is the first 48 words (0...47) of the

target integer file.

Table 21 - Possible Controller Modes by Mode Switch Position

When the Mode Switch Positions at Possible Controller Modes are

PROGRAM

Download in progress

Program mode

Suspend mode – Operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction

Current mode switch position

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 89

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Change Mode Switch Position

Mode Switch position can be changed at two different times using the LCD keypad. One is

when the controller is powered up, and the other is while the controller is powered on.

Mode Switch position can be set to either PROG or RUN when the controller is powered up. This

allows the controller operation, which differs from the previous mode, that is, any program

under RUN before can be stopped or any new program can be run when the controller is

powered up.

To forcibly set Mode Switch to RUN when the controller is powered up:

• Press OK for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up. The following LCD screen

appears if it’s successfully done.

To forcibly set Mode Switch to PROG when the controller is powered up:

• Press ESC for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up. The following LCD screen

appears if it’s successfully done.

Note that I/O output status may be changed for some programs.

REMOTE

Remote download in progress

Remote program mode

Remote suspend mode – Operation halted by execution of the SUS

instruction

Remote Run mode

Remote Test continuous mode

Remote Test single scan mode

RUN Run mode

Table 21 - Possible Controller Modes by Mode Switch Position (Continued)

When the Mode Switch Positions at Possible Controller Modes are

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

While the controller is powered on, follow these steps to change the position of the Mode

Switch.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Mode Switch by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Mode Switch screen displays.

The arrow indicates the current Mode Switch position.

3. When the Up or Down key is pressed, the mode indicated by the arrow blinks if the

mode is different from the current mode of the controller. Press OK to set the controller

to the mode indicated by the arrow.

4. If you have finished changing the mode switch position, press ESC to return to the Main

Menu screen, as shown in step 1

Use a User-defined LCD

Screen

The MicroLogix 1100 controller allows you to use user-defined LCD screens instead of the

default built-in screens.

To use a user-defined screen, you must create a group of appropriate instructions using the

LCD instruction in your application program. For more information on how to create a user-

defined LCD screen, see the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set

Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

By using the User Displ menu item, you can change from the default built-in screens to a user-

defined screen and back on the LCD.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 91

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

User-defined LCD Screen

Follow these steps to display the user-defined screen implemented in your application

program.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select User Displ by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad. If the menu items are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, scroll down the

screen by pressing the Down key.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad.

If no user-defined screen is used in your application program, the following screen

displays.

The U-MSG indicator on the top of the LCD displays as a solid rectangle. It means that

the LCD is in User-defined LCD mode.

If a user-defined screen is used in your application program, the LCD screen displays,

according to the specific instructions used in your program.

COMM0

COMM1

DCOM

AT.

MSG

COMM0

COMM1

COMM

BAT

U-MSG

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

3. Press ESC longer than 3 seconds to return to the Main Menu screen.

Configure Advanced

Settings

With the Advanced Settings menu, which is a submenu under the main menu of the LCD, you

can use the following features:

• Change Key In mode

• Use Communications Toggle functionality

• View Ethernet port configuration

• Use trimpots

• View system information

•View fault code

You can access to the Advanced Settings Menu screen by selecting Advance Set on the Main

Menu screen.

Change Key In Mode Key In Modes

There are two Key In modes, Continuous and Discrete.

The current Key In mode determines how the value changes are applied when you press the Up

and Down keys to change the data value for a trimpot. When set to Continuous, the changes

apply immediately when you press the Up and Down keys. When set to Discrete, the changes

apply only when you press OK after you have changed the value using the Up and Down keys.

By using the Key In Mode screen, as shown in Figure 78

, you can change the Key In mode to

use.

The Key In mode has effect only when you change the data value of a trimpot on a

trimpot screen, either Trimpot 0 or Trimpot 1 screen. For more information on how

to change the data value of a trimpot, see Changing Data Value of a Trimpot on

page 97.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 93

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Figure 78 - Key In Mode Screen

Change Key In Mode

To change the current Key In mode, perform the following:.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad. If the menu items are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, you must scroll

down the screen by pressing the Down key.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Advanced Settings Menu screen displays.

3. Select KeyIn Mode using the Up and Down keys, then press OK.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

4. The Key In Mode screen displays. The current mode, Continuous in this example, is

selected marked up with the symbol “ ”.

5. Press the Up or Down key to select the different mode, Discrete in this example. Then,

press OK.

6. The Key In Mode Change Notification screen displays.

7. Press ESC to return to the Advanced Settings Menu screen, as shown in step 2

Communications Toggle

Functionality

The MicroLogix 1100 controller provides the Communications Toggle functionality, which

allows you to switch between the user-defined communication configuration and the default

communications mode on Channel 0. See Use the Communications Toggle Functionality on

page 52 for information on this feature.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 95

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Ethernet Port Configuration The Ethernet Port Configuration screen of the LCD displays the MAC and IP addresses assigned

to the controller.

Follow these steps to view the Ethernet port configuration for your controller.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad. If the menu items are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, scroll down the

screen by pressing the Down key.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Advanced Settings Menu screen displays.

3. If ENET Cfg is selected, press OK.

If not, select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys, then press OK.

4. The Ethernet Port Configuration screen displays.

When an IP address is not yet assigned to your controller, only the MAC address that is

assigned to your controller, which is represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX, displays.

A MAC address is a 12-digit hexadecimal number. Your controller ships with a unique

MAC address assigned in the factory. You can identify the MAC address of your

controller by opening the expansion module cover on your controller.

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

When an IP address is assigned to your controller, both of MAC address and IP address

of your controller are displayed. In this example, the MAC address is represented as

XXXXXXXXXXXX, which is a 12-digit hexadecimal number. The IP address is represented

as xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each xxx is a decimal number between 0…255.

5. Press ESC to return to the Advanced Settings Menu screen, as shown in step 2

Trimpots Trimpot Operation

The MicroLogix 1100 controller provides two trimming potentiometers (trimpots, POT0 and

POT1), which allow modification of integer data within the controller. The data value of each

trimpot can be used throughout the control program for timers, counters, analog presets, and

so on, depending upon the requirements of the application.

You can change the data value of each trimpot using the trimpot screens that are provided by

the LCD. To access the Trimpot Set screen, which is the top screen for the trimpot

functionality, select TrimPot Set on the LCD default menu screen, and press OK on the LCD

keypad.

Trimpot data is updated continuously whenever the controller is powered-up.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 97

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

Changing Data Value of a Trimpot

Follow these steps to change the data value of a trimpot, either POT0 or POT1.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select TrimPot Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The TrimPot Select screen displays.

The last trim pot whose data value you changed is selected by default. If you are accessing to this screen for the first time, POT0 is selected by de fault.

3. Select a trimpot, either POT0 or POT1, whose data value you want to change using the

Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad. In this example, we select POT0.

4. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Trimpot 0 screen displays.

TMIN and TMAX indicate the range of data values for the trimpots, both POT0 and POT1.

The factory default for TMIN, TMAX, and POT0 values are 0, 250, and 0 in decimal,

respectively. TMIN and TMAX on this screen are read-only, but you can change them

using the LCD Function File in your application program. The TMIN and TMAX elements

can only be changed by a program download.

For more information on how to change trimpot configurations including TMIN and

TMAX, see the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

IMPORTANT The same TMIN and TMAX values are used for both trimpots,

POT0 and POT1. This behavior is intended by design for simplicity

in the trimpot configuration.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

When you enter this screen, the last digit of the POT0 value flashes. It indicates the

current digit. Press the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad to change the value of the

current digit. Press the Left and Right keys to select another digit as the current digit.

If the Key In mode is set to Continuous, the changes are applied immediately after you

press the Up and Down keys. While if it is set to Discrete, you have to press OK to apply

the changes after you change the data value. For more information on how to set the

Key In mode, see Change Key In Mode on page 92

5. If you have finished changing the data value of the selected trimpot, POT0 in this

example, press ESC to return to the TrimPot Select screen, as shown in step 2

Trimpot Configuration in LCD Function File

The configuration for trimpots in the LCD Function File, including trimpot low and high values

for data value range, is described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction

Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.

Error Conditions

Error conditions regarding the trimpot functionality are described in the MicroLogix 1100

Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.

View System Information The System Information screen of the LCD allows you to identify the system information for

your controller.

Follow these steps to view the system information for your controller.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad. If the menu items are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, scroll down the

screen by pressing the Down key.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Advanced Settings Menu screen displays.

3. If System Info is selected, press OK.

If not, select System Info using the Up and Down keys, then press OK.

The Key In mode has an effect only when you change the data value of a

trimpot on a trimpot screen, either the Trimpot 0 or Trimpot 1 screen.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 99

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

4. The System Information screen displays.

You can identify the catalog number, operating system firmware revision number, and

boot firmware revision number of your controller.

5. Press ESC to return to the Advanced Settings Menu screen, as shown in step 2

View Fault Code The Fault Code screen of the LCD displays the fault code when a fault occurs.

When a fault occurs, the Fault Code screen does not display automatically. Only the FAULT LED

on the controller flashes in red light. Therefore, you must navigate into the Fault Code screen

to identify the fault code on the LCD.

Follow these steps to view the fault code when a fault occurs.

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD

keypad. If the menu items are not displayed on the Main Menu screen, scroll down the

screen by pressing the Down key.

2. Press OK on the LCD keypad. The Advanced Settings Menu screen displays.

3. If Fault Code is selected, press OK.

If not, select Fault Code using the Up and Down keys, then press OK.

4. The Fault Code screen displays.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 5 Use the LCD and Keypad

If no fault occurred, “0000h” displays.

If a fault occurred, its fault code displays.

5. Press ESC to return to the Advanced Settings Menu screen, as shown in step 2.

For more information on a specific fault code, see the Online Help of your

RSLogix 500 programming software.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 101

Chapter 6

Use Real-time Clock and Memory Modules

The MicroLogix 1100 controller has a built-in real-time clock (RTC). You can order a memory

module as an accessory.

One type of memory module is available for use with the MicroLogix 1100 controller.

Real-time Clock Operation Operation at Power-up and Entering a Run or Test Mode

At power-up and when the controller enters a run or test mode, the values (date, time, and

status) of the RTC are written to the RTC Function File in the controller.

Table 22

indicates the accuracy of the RTC for various temperatures.

Write Data to the Real-time Clock

When valid data is sent to the real-time clock from the programming device or another

controller, the new values take effect immediately.

The real-time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or time data.

RTC Battery Operation

The real-time clock uses the same replaceable battery that the controller uses. The RTC

Function File features a battery low indicator bit (RTC:0/BL), which shows the status of the

replacement battery. When the battery is low, the indicator bit is set (1). This means that the

battery wire connector could be disconnected or if the battery is connected, the battery may

be ready to fail in the next two weeks. In the latter case, the replacement battery must be

replaced with a new one. When the battery low indicator bit is clear (0), the battery level is

acceptable.

The Battery Low (BAT.LO) indicator on the LCD display of the controller also shows the status of

the replaceable battery. When the battery is low, the indicator displays as a solid rectangle ( ).

When the battery level is acceptable, the indicator displays as an empty rectangle ( ), as

shown in Figure 79

For more information on real-time clock function file and memory module

information file, see the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set

Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.

Catalog Number Function Memory Size

1763-MM1 Memory Module 128 KB

Table 22 - RTC Accuracy

Ambient Temperature

Accuracy

(1)

(1) These numbers are maximum worst case values over a 31-day month.

0 °C (32 °F) -13...-121 seconds/month

25 °C (77 °F) +54...-5 seconds/month

40 °C (104 °F) +29...-78 seconds/month

55 °C (131 °F) -43...-150 seconds/month

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 6 Use Real-time Clock and Memory Modules

Figure 79 - LCD Battery Level Indicator

If the RTC battery is low and the controller is powered, the RTC operates normally. If the

controller power is removed and the RTC battery is low, RTC data is lost.

Memory Module Operation The memory module supports the following features:

• User Program, User Data, and Recipe Back-up

• User Program Compare

• Data File Download Protection

• Memory Module Write Protection

• Removal/Insertion Under Power

• Memory Module Information File

• Program/Data Download

• Program/Data Upload

User Program, User Data, and Recipe Back-up

The memory module provides a simple and flexible program, data and recipe transport

mechanism, allowing the user to transfer the program, data, and recipe to the controller

without the use of a personal computer and programming software.

The memory module can store one user program at a time.

During program transfers to or from the memory module, the controller’s RUN LED flashes.

Program Compare

The memory module can also provide application security, allowing you to specify that if the

program stored in the memory module does not match the program in the controller, the

controller will not enter an executing (run or test) mode. To enable this feature, set the S:2/9

bit in the system status file. See “Status System File” in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

for more information.

ATTENTION: Operating with a low battery indication for more than 14 days (8

hours without a battery) may result in invalid RTC data unless power is on

continuously.

COM

COMM

DCOMM

BAT

U-

MSG

ATTENTION: Electrostatic discharge can damage the memory module. Do not

touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 103

Chapter 6 Use Real-time Clock and Memory Modules

Data File Download Protection

The memory module supports data file download protection. This allows user data to be saved

(not overwritten) during a download.

Memory Module Write Protection

The memory module supports write-once, read-many behavior. Write protection is enabled

using your programming software.

Removal/Insertion Under Power

The memory module can be installed or removed at any time without risk of damage to either

the memory module or the controller, except during a data transaction. If the memory module

is removed during a data transaction, data corruption can occur.

If a memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1100 controller is executing, the memory

module is not recognized until either a power cycle occurs, or until the controller is placed in a

non-executing mode (program mode, suspend mode, or fault condition).

Memory Module Information File

The controller has a Memory Module Information (MMI) File, which provides status from the

attached memory module. At power-up or on detection of a memory module being inserted,

the catalog number, series, revision, and type are identified and written to the MMI file. If a

memory module is not attached, zeros are written to the MMI file. See the MicroLogix 1100

Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

, for more

information.

Program/Data Download

To download the program and data from a memory module to the controller’s memory, on the

“Comms” menu in your RSLogix 500 programming software, point “EEPROM” and then select

“Load from EEPROM”.

Program/Data Upload

To upload the program and data from the controller’s memory to a memory module, on the

“Comms” menu in your RSLogix 500 programming software, point “EEPROM” and then select

“Store to EEPROM”.

Data file download protection is only functional if the processor does not have a

fault, the size of all protected data files in the memory module exactly match the

size of protected data files within the controller, and all protected data files are of

the same type. See “Protecting Data Files During Download” in the MicroLogix 1100

Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication

1763-RM001

IMPORTANT Once set, write protection cannot be removed. A change cannot be

made to the control program stored in a write-protected memory

module. If a change is required, use another memory module.

For more information on program/data download, see your RSLogix 500

programming software documentation.

For more information on program/data upload, see your RSLogix 500

programming software documentation.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 6 Use Real-time Clock and Memory Modules

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 105

Chapter 7

Online Editing

Overview of Online Editing Online editing of ladder programs is available when using MicroLogix 1100 controller. Use this

function to make changes to a pre-existing ladder program. Online editing functions consist of

inserting, replacing, and deleting rungs in an existing ladder program while online with the

processor.

Only one programming device can perform an online edit of a user program at a time. When an

online editing session begins, an access from other programming devices are rejected by the

MicroLogix 1100 controller.

Table 23

summarizes the differences between offline and online editing.

Online Editing Terms

The following terms are used throughout this chapter.

• Assemble edits — Deletes any rungs marked with Delete or Replace edit zone markers

during an online editing session. Inserted or modified rungs remain. All edit zone

markers are removed when this function is complete.

• Cancel edits — Deletes any inserted or modified rungs added during an online editing

session. Rungs marked with Delete and Replace edit zone markers remain. All edit zone

markers are removed when this function is complete.

• Test edits — Allows you to verify that the changes you entered are not going to cause

improper machine operation before you make the changes a permanent part of your

ladder program.

• Untest edits — Allows you to disable testing

ATTENTION: Before initiating an online editing session, we recommend that

you fully understand the possible results of the edit to the system under

control. Failure to properly edit a running program could result in unexpected

controller operation. Physical injury or equipment damage may result.

While three instructions, MSG, PTO, and PWM, are supported by program mode

online edit, they are not supported by RUNTIME (RUN mode) online edit. See

the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference

Manual, publication 1763-RM001

for additional details.

Table 23 - Differences Between Offline and Online Editing

Offline Online

No restrictions exist. Full

editing capabilities are allowed.

Data table file resizing is not permitted.

Program file creation and deletion are not permitted.

Alteration of file protection is not permitted.

Alteration of static and constant data file values is not permitted.

Indexing across file boundary selections is not permitted.

Force protection selection is not permitted.

I/O configuration is not permitted.

IMPORTANT It is important to keep in mind that some ladder instructions, when

programmed online, cause data table values to change. These

instructions are those that require timer, counter, and control

addresses to be specified. This is discussed later in the chapter.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 7 Online Editing

• Edit zone markers — Appear on the power rail of the ladder program display. They

indicate the type of edit taking place on the rung.

• Accept rung — Incorporates the edits of a rung into the ladder program

• Online edit session — Begins when a user tries to edit rungs while online. Any other

programming device that was monitoring the user program is removed from the

program monitor display.

• Modify rung — When an existing rung is modified two edit zones are created. The

original rung is indicated by replace zone markers on the power rail. A copy of the

original rung is made so you can insert, delete, or modify instructions. This rung is

indicated by insert zone markers on the power rail. Thus, an IR pair is created when you

modify a rung.

• Runtime online editing — The user program is executing when an edit takes place. Any

rungs that are inserted, modified, or deleted remain in the ladder program and are

indicated by edit zone markers on the power rail. Edit zone markers remain after an

action is completed.

• Program online editing — The user program is not executing when an edit session

begins. Any action that inserts, deletes, or modifies a rung takes place immediately.

Figure 80

shows the process that is involved when performing a runtime online edit.

Figure 80 - Online Edit Runtime Process

Effects of Online Editing On

Your System

The following section covers the effects of online editing on your system. Keep these items in

mind while using the online editing function.

System Impacts

The scan time and interrupt latency can be extended when accepting a rung, assembling, or

canceling edits.

Memory limitations – Online edit can be performed until there is insufficient program

memory available in the processor. Note that, before assemble edits, all edited rungs are in the

processor memory consuming memory, although they are not executed.

Data Table File Size

Online editing cannot change the size of existing data tables nor can new ones be created.

However, some ladder instructions, when programmed cause data table values to change.

These instructions are those that require timer, counter, and control addresses to be

specified.

Begin Edit Session

Edits complete

Test Edits

Assemble Edits

Untest Edits

Cancel Edits

End Edit Session

Edits work

Online Edit

Remove edits

Edits do not work

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 107

Chapter 7 Online Editing

Online Edit Error

If either electrical interference, communication loss, or a power cycle occur during an online

edit session, program integrity may be impacted. In this case, the controller generates the 1F

fault code, clears the user program, and loads the default program.

Directions and Cautions for

MicroLogix 1100 Online

Edit User

Change the RSLinx “Configure CIP Option”

(OS Series A FRN 1, 2, and 3 only)

Change the RSLinx “Configure CIP Option” to prevent ownership fault when a MicroLogix 1100

controller is connected using the RSLinx® Classic EtherNet/IP driver.

Several RSLogix 500 Online operations require obtaining the processor Edit Resource/

Processor Ownership to confirm that one programming terminal has exclusive capability of

performing any of these operations at a time. These operations include downloading, online

editing, and applying channel configuration changes.

In addition to reducing the number of RSLinx Messaging Connections per PLC to one, it is also

recommended that the Messaging Connection Retry Interval be increased from the default of

1.25 seconds to 8 seconds as shown in Figure 81

Figure 81 - Increase Message Connection Retry Interval

A Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing

At least one download is required before starting online editing.

If you are using a MicroLogix 1100 controller from the out-of-box state or after clearing the

processor memory or a firmware update, at least one download is required before starting

online edits. If not, an error occurs and the programming software goes offline due to default

image mismatch between the RSLogix 500 programming software and the MicroLogix 1100

controller. You can also see the fault code 1Fh, which is a user-defined fault code.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 7 Online Editing

To help prevent this error, you must download the program to the MicroLogix 1100 controller,

although the program is empty.

This problem happens only in the out-of-box state or after clearing processor memory.

In online edit during PROGRAM mode (program online edit), there are no restrictions. For

example, a user can insert an MSG instruction if a related MG file or MG/RI file is already

defined in the data file.

Types of Online Editing The type of online editing is dependent on the MicroLogix 1100 controller’s mode switch

position in the LCD display and the processor’s mode. There are two types of online editing:

• Program Online Editing — When the controller is in either PROG mode or REM Program

mode

• Runtime Online Editing — When the controller is in either REM Test or REM Run mode

Table 24

summarizes the MicroLogix 1100 controller mode switch positions in the LCD and

modes that enable online editing.

ATTENTION: PTO and PWM instructions may not be deleted during runtime

online edit. This is because if the PTO or PWM instructions were deleted during

runtime online edit, outputs could stop in an unpredictable state, causing

unexpected equipment operation.

If you attempt to insert or modify a rung with MSG, PTO, and PWM instruction,

the following error message is generated by the programming software

“Error: Online editing of PTO, PWM, and MSG are not allowed on ML1100 RUN

mode.” And, the rung with MSG, PTO, and PWM instruction is not accepted.

ATTENTION: When editing a rung that contains an MCR instruction, both the

MCR start and MCR end rungs must be edited (whether it be test/assemble/

cancel) simultaneously. We recommend that you fully understand the possible

results of the edit to the system under control. Failure to properly edit a

running program could result in unexpected controller operation. Physical

injury or equipment damage may result.

ATTENTION: If you use EII or STI interrupts and your application requires a

quick interrupt latency, the online edit feature is not recommended. The

online editing feature may increase the interrupt latency response time. To

achieve minimum interrupt latency, place the mode switch in the LCD screen

in the RUN mode. This prevents the use of the online editing feature.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 109

Chapter 7 Online Editing

Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing

During a runtime online editing session, the processor is executing ladder logic. The edit zone

markers tell the processor that changes exist, but the changes are not executed until you test

the edits.

Deleted and replaced (modified) rungs are not removed from the program and inserted rungs

are not executed until you assemble the edits.

Edit Functions in Program Online Editing

During a program online editing session, the processor is not executing ladder logic. This

mode is like the offline editing mode. If a runtime online editing session was performed before

entering the offline editing mode, edit marked rungs (I, IR, and D) appear in the program.

If you perform a program online edit, once you accept or delete the rung, the edits take effect

immediately and the power rail is displayed as a solid line. If you edit a rung with edit zone

markers, the markers are removed when the rung is accepted.

Table 24 - Mode Switch Positions

Mode Switch Position MicroLogix 1100 Controller Mode Editing Mode

RUN Run Not Available

PROGram Program Program Online Editing

REMote Remote Program Program Online Editing

REMote Remote Test Program Online Editing

REMote Remote Run Program Online Editing

IMPORTANT Online editing is not available when the mode switch in the LCD screen

is in the RUN position.

ATTENTION: Use the online editing function while in RUN mode to make minor

changes to the ladder program. We recommend developing your program

offline since ladder rung logic changes take effect immediately after testing

your edits. Improper machine operation may occur, causing personnel injury

or equipment damage.

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Chapter 7 Online Editing

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 111

Appendix A

Specifications

MicroLogix 1100 Controller

Specifications

General Specifications

Description 1763-L16AWA 1763-L16BWA 1763-L16BBB 1763-L16DWD

Dimensions, HxWxD

90 x 110 x 87 mm

3.5 x

4.33

x 3.43 in.

Height is 1

04 mm (4.09 in.) with DIN latch open

Shipping weight 0.9 kg (2.0 lbs)

Number of I/O 12 inputs (10 digital and 2 analog) and 6 outputs

Power supply voltage

100…240V AC (-15%, +10%)

@ 47…63 Hz

24V DC (-15%, +10%)

Class 2 SELV

12…24V DC (-15%, +10%)

Class 2 SELV

Heat dissipation See System Loading and Heat Dissipation on page 165

Power supply inrush current, max

120V AC: 25 A for 8 ms

240V AC: 40 A for 4 ms

24V DC: 15 A for 20 ms

Maximum power consumption 46VA 52VA

35 W

See Figure 82

24V DC sensor power None

250 mA @ 24V DC

AC Ripple < 500 mV peak-to-peak

400 µF max

None

Input circuit type

Digital: 120V AC

Analog: 0…10V DC

Digital: 24V DC sinking/sourcing

(standard and high-speed)

Analog: 0…10V DC

Digital: 24V DC sinking/sourcing

(standard and high-speed)

Analog: 0…10V DC

Output circuit type Relay Relay Relay/FET Relay

Pilot duty rating

Ordinary location – B300, R150

Hazardous location – C300, R150

Temperature, operating -20…+65 °C (-4…+149 °F) ambient

Temperature, storage -40…+85 °C (-40…+185 °F) ambient

Relative humidity 5%…95% noncondensing

Vibration

Operating: 10…500 Hz, 5 g, 0.015 in. max peak-to-peak, 2 hours each axis

Relay Operation: 1.5 g

Shock, operating

30 g; 3 pulses each direction, each axis

Relay Operation: 10 g

Shock, nonoperating 50 g panel mounted (40 g DIN Rail mounted); 3 pulses each direction, each axis

Terminal screw torque 0.56

N•m

(5.0

lb•in

)

rated

Agency certification

UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Class 1 Division 2, Hazardous Locations, Groups A, B, C, D

cUL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Canada

CE marked for all applicable directives

RCM marked for all applicable acts

ESD immunity

EN 61000-4-2

4 kV contact, 8 kV air, 4 kV indirect

Radiated RF immunity

EN 61000-4-3

10V/m, 26…1000 MHz (alternatively, 80…1000 MHz),

80% amplitude modulation, +900 MHz keyed carrier

Fast transient immunity

EN 61000-4-4

2 kV, 5 kHz

Communications cables such as Ethernet, RS-232, and RS-485: 1 kV, 5 kHz

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

Figure 82 - MicroLogix 1100 DC Input Power Requirements for 1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD Unit

Surge transient immunity

EN 61000-4-5

Unshielded communications cable: 2 kV CM (common mode), 1 kV DM (differential mode)

Shielded communications cable: 1 kV galvanic gun

I/O: 2 kV CM (common mode), 1 kV DM (differential mode)

AC power supply input: 4 kV CM (common mode), 2 kV DM (differential mode)

DC power supply input: 500V CM (common mode), 500V DM (differential mode)

AC/DC auxiliary output: 500V CM (common mode), 500V DM (differential mode)

Conducted RF immunity

EN 61000-4-6

10V, 150 kHz…80 MHz

Conducted emissions

EN 55011

AC power supply input: 150 kHz…30 MHz

Radiated emissions

EN 55011

30…1000 MHz

Line related tests

EN 61000-4-11

AC power supply input:

• Voltage drop: -30% for 10 ms, -60% for 100 ms

• Voltage interrupt: at voltage greater than -95% for 5 s

• Voltage fluctuation: +10% for 15 min, -10% for 15 min

DC power supply input:

Voltage fluctuation: +20% for 15 min, -20% for 15 min

General Specifications (Continued)

Description 1763-L16AWA 1763-L16BWA 1763-L16BBB 1763-L16DWD

1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD Typical Power Requirements

Calculated Load Power (Watts)

(

)

48121620

Digital Input Specifications

Description 1763-L16AWA

1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB

Inputs 0...3

(4 high-speed DC inputs)

Inputs 4 and Higher

(6 standard DC inputs)

On-state voltage range 79…132V AC

14…24V DC

14…26.4V DC (+10%) @ 65 °C/149 °F

14…30V DC (+25%) @ 30 °C/86 °F

10…24V DC

10…26.4V DC (+10%) @ 65 °C/149 °F

10…30V DC (+25%) @ 30 °C/86 °F

Off-state voltage range 0…20V AC 0…5V DC

Operating frequency 47 Hz…63 Hz

0 Hz…20 kHz

0 Hz…40 kHz

(1)

0 Hz…1 kHz

(scan time dependent)

On-state current:

Min

Nom

Max

5.0 mA @ 79V AC

12 mA @ 120V AC

16.0 mA @ 132V AC

2.5 mA @ 14V DC

9.8 mA @ 24V DC

12.0 mA @ 30V DC

2.0 mA @ 10V DC

8.5 mA @ 24V DC

12.0 mA @ 30V DC

Off-state leakage current, max 2.5 mA 1.5 mA

Nominal impedance

12 kΩ @ 50 Hz

10 kΩ @ 60 Hz

3.1 kΩ 3.1 kΩ

Inrush current @ 120V AC, max 250 mA Not applicable

(1) OS series B FRN 4 or later

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 113

Appendix A Specifications

Digital Input Specifications for 1763-L16DWD

Description

1763-L16DWD

Inputs 0...3

(4 high-speed DC inputs)

Inputs 4 and Higher

(6 standard DC inputs)

On-state voltage range

10…24V DC @ 65 °C/149 °F

10…30V DC @ 30 °C/86 °F

Off-state voltage range 0…5V DC

Operating frequency

0 Hz…40 kHz

(1)

(1) OS series B FRN 4 or later

0 Hz…1 kHz

On-state current:

Min

Nom

Max

2.0 mA @ 10V DC

8.5 mA @ 24V DC

12.0 mA @ 30V DC

Off-state leakage current, max 1.5 mA

Nominal impedance 2.61 kΩ 3.1 kΩ

Maximum inrush current Not applicable

Analog Input Specifications

Description 1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB, 1763-L16DWD

Voltage input range 0…10.0V DC, - 1 LSB

Type of data 10-bit unsigned integer

Input coding (0...10.0V DC, - 1 LSB) 0…+1,023

Voltage input impedance 210 kΩ

Input resolution 10 bit

Non-linearity ±1.0% of full scale

Overall accuracy

-20…+65 °C (-4…+149 °F)

±1.0% of full scale

Voltage input overvoltage protection 10.5V DC

Field wiring to logic isolation Non-isolated with logic

Output Specifications For Hazardous Locations Applications (Class I Division 2, Groups A, B,

C, D) - General

Description

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA,

1763-L16DWD

1763-L16BBB

Relay and FET Outputs

Maximum controlled load 1080VA 360VA

Maximum Continuous Current

Current per group common 3 A 3 A

Current per controller

@ 150V max 18 A or a total of per-point loads, whichever is less

@ 240V max 18 A or a total of per-point loads, whichever is less

Relay Outputs

Turn on time/Turn off time, max

10 ms

(1)

(1) Scan time dependent

Relay life - Electrical (Resistive Load) See Figure 83

Relay life - Mechanical 10,000,000 cycles

Load current, min 10 mA

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

Relay Contact Ratings

(1)

(1) Pilot Duty Rating: (ordinary location) – B300, R150. (hazardous location) – C300, R150.

Maximum Volts

Amperes

Amperes Continuous

Voltamperes

Make Break Make Break

240V AC

(2)

(2) For AC voltage applications lower than 240V AC but higher than 120V AC, the maximum make and break ratings are to be

obtained by dividing the voltampere rating by the application voltage.

7.5 A 0.75 A 2.5 A 1800VA 180VA

120V AC

(3)

(3) For AC voltage applications lower than 120V AC, the maximum make current is to be the same as for 120V AC, and the

maximum break current is to be obtained by dividing the break voltampere rating by the application voltage, but the currents

are not to exceed the thermal continuous current.

15.0 A 1.5 A 2.5 A 1800VA 180VA

125V DC

(4)

(4) For DC voltage applications lower than 125V DC, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by

dividing the voltampere rating by the applied DC voltage but the current values are not to exceed the thermal continuous

current.

0.22 A 1.0 A 28VA

ATTENTION: Do not exceed the “Current per group common” specification.

Output Specifications For Ordinary (Non-Hazardous) Locations only - General

Description

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA,

1763-L16DWD

1763-L16BBB

Relay and FET Outputs

Maximum controlled load 1440VA 720VA

Maximum Continuous Current

Current per group common

5 A

(1)

(1) 3.0 A above 40 °C (104 °F)

5 A

Current per controller

@ 150V max 30 A or a total of per-point loads, whichever is less

@ 240V max 20 A or a total of per-point loads, whichever is less

Relay Outputs

Turn on time/Turn off time, max

10 ms

(2)

(2) Scan time dependent

Relay life - Electrical (Resistive Load) See Figure 83

Relay life - Mechanical 10,000,000 cycles

Load current, min 10 mA

Relay Contact Ratings

(1)

(1) Pilot Duty Rating: (ordinary location) – B300, R150. (hazardous location) – C300, R150.

Maximum Volts

Amperes

Amperes Continuous

Voltamperes

Make Break Make Break

240V AC

(2)

(2) For AC voltage applications lower than 240V AC but higher than 120V AC, the maximum make and break ratings are to be

obtained by dividing the voltampere rating by the application voltage.

15.0 A 1.5 A

5.0 A

(3)

(3) 3.0 A above 40 °C (104 °F).

3600VA 360VA

120V AC

(4)

(4) For AC voltage applications lower than 120V AC, the maximum make current is to be the same as for 120V AC, and the

maximum break current is to be obtained by dividing the break voltampere rating by the application voltage, but the currents

are not to exceed the thermal continuous current.

30.0 A 3.0 A 3600VA 360VA

125V DC

(5)

(5) For DC voltage applications lower than 125V DC, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by

dividing the voltampere rating by the applied DC voltage but the current values are not to exceed the thermal continuous

current.

0.22 A 1.0 A 28VA

ATTENTION: Do not exceed the “Current per group common” specification.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 115

Appendix A Specifications

Figure 83 - Relay Life Chart

BBB FET Output Specifications

Description General Operation

High-speed Operation

(1)

(Output 2 and 3 Only)

(1) Outputs 2 and 3 are designed to provide increased functionality over the other FET outputs. Output 2 and 3 may be used like

the other FET transistor outputs, but in addition, within a limited current range, they may be operated at a higher speed.

Outputs 2 and 3 also provide a pulse train output (PTO) or pulse-width modulation output (PWM) function.

Power supply voltage 24V DC (-15%, +10%)

On-state voltage drop:

@ maximum load current

@ maximum surge current

1V DC

2.5V DC

Not applicable

Current rating per point:

Maximum load

Minimum load

Maximum leakage

See Figure 84

1.0 mA

100 mA

10 mA

1.0 mA

Surge current per point:

Peak current

Maximum surge duration

Maximum rate of repetition @ 30 °C (86 °F)

Maximum rate of repetition @ 55 °C (131 °F)

4.0 A

10 ms

Once every second

Once every 2 seconds

Not applicable

Turn-on time, max 0.1 ms 6 µs

Turn-off time, max 1.0 ms 18 µs

Repeatability, max Not applicable 2 µs

Drift, max Not applicable 1 µs per 5 °C (9 °F)

Number of operations (x 10

)

Switching capacity(A)

1000

500

300

100

2468 10

30 VDC resistive

load

250 VAC resistive load

250 VAC induction

load (cosφ=0.4)

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

Figure 84 - Maximum Output Current (Temperature Dependent)

AC Input Filter Settings

Nominal Filter Setting (ms)

ON Delay (ms) OFF Delay (ms)

Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

8 2 20 10 20

0.25

10 °C

(50 °F)

30 °C

(86 °F)

50 °C

(122 °F)

0.75 A, 65 °C (149 °F)

1.5 A, 30 °C (86 °F)

70 °C

(158 °F)

80 °C

(176 °F)

0.5

0.75

1.0

1.25

1.5

1.75

2.0

FET Current per Point

(1763-L16BBB)

Current (Amps)

Temperature

Valid

range

1.0

10 °C

(50 °F)

30 °C

(86 °F)

50 °C

(122 °F)

1.5 A, 65 °C (149 °F)

3.0 A, 30 °C (86 °F)

70 °C

(158 °F)

80 °C

(176 °F)

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

6.0

7.0

8.0

FET Total Current

(1763-L16BBB)

Current (Amps)

Temperature

Valid

range

High-speed DC Input Filter Settings (Inputs 0…3)

Nominal Filter Setting (ms)

ON Delay (ms) OFF Delay (ms)

Maximum Counter Frequency (Hz) 50% Duty Cycle

Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

00125 0.005 0.0125 0.003 0.0085

40.0 kHz

(1)

0.025 0.005 0.025 0.005 0.025 20.0 kHz

0.075 0.040 0.075 0.045 0.075 6.7 kHz

0.100 0.050 0.100 0.060 0.100 5.0 kHz

0.250 0.170 0.250 0.210 0.250 2.0 kHz

0.500 0.370 0.500 0.330 0.500 1.0 kHz

1.00 0.700 1.000 0.800 1.000 0.5 kHz

2.000 1.700 2.000 1.600 2.000 250 Hz

4.000 3.400 4.000 3.600 4.000 125 Hz

8.000

(2)

6.700 8.000 7.300 8.000 63 Hz

16.000 14.000 16.000 14.000 16.000 31 Hz

(1) OS series B FRN 4 or later

(2) This is the default setting.

Standard DC Input Filter Settings (Inputs 4 and Higher)

Nominal Filter Setting (ms)

ON Delay (ms) OFF Delay (ms)

Maximum Frequency (Hz)

50% Duty Cycle

Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

0.500 0.090 0.500 0.020 0.500 1.0 kHz

1.000 0.500 1.000 0.400 1.000 0.5 kHz

2.000 1.100 2.000 1.300 2.000 250 Hz

4.000 2.800 4.000 2.700 4.000 125 Hz

8.000

(1)

5.800 8.000 5.300 8.000 63 Hz

16.000 11.000 16.000 10.000 16.000 31 Hz

(1) This is the default setting.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 117

Appendix A Specifications

Working Voltage – 1763-L16AWA

Description 1763-L16AWA

Power supply input to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V AC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Input group to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1517V AC for 1 s or 2145V DC for 1 s

132V AC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Input group to input group isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1517V AC for 1 s or 2145V DC for 1 s

132V AC Working Voltage (basic insulation)

Output group to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V AC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Output group to output group isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V AC Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V AC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Working Voltage – 1763-L16BWA

Description 1763-L16BWA

Power supply input to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V

Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Input group to backplane isolation and input group

to input group isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s

75V DC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Output group to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V

Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Output group to output group isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V

Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Working Voltage – 1763-L16BBB

Description 1762-L16BBB

Input group to backplane isolation and input group

to input group isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s

75V DC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

FET output group to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s

75V DC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Relay output group to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V

Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Relay output group to relay output group and FET

output group isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V

Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Working Voltage – 1763-L16DWD

Description 1763-L16DWD

Input group to backplane isolation and input group

to input group isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s

75V DC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Output group to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V

Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Output group to output group isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V

Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

1762 Expansion I/O

Specifications

Digital I/O Modules

General Specifications – Digital I/O Modules

Attribute Value

Dimensions

Height: 90 mm (3.54 in.), 110 mm (4.33 in.) (including mounting tabs)

Width: 87 mm (3.43 in.)

Depth: 40.4 mm (1.59 in.)

Enclosure type rating None (open-style)

Input Specifications – 1762-IA8, 1762-IQ8, 1762-IQ16, 1762-IQ32T, 1762-IQ8OW6

Attribute 1762-IA8 1762-IQ8 1762-IQ16 1762-IQ32T 1762-IQ8OW6

Shipping weight, approx.

(with carton)

209 g (0.46 lbs.) 200 g (0.44 lbs.) 230 g (0.51 lbs.) 200 g (0.44 lbs.) 280 g (0.62 lbs.)

Voltage category 100/120V AC

24V DC (sinking/

sourcing)

(1)

24V DC (sinking/

sourcing)

(1)

24V DC (sinking/

sourcing)

(1)

24V DC (sinking/sourcing)

(1)

Operating voltage range 79…132V AC at 47…63 Hz

10…30V DC at 30 °C (86 °F)

10…26.4V DC at

°C

(131

°F

)

10…30V DC

10…26.4V DC

(2)(3)

10…30V DC (24 points) at

30 °C (86 °F)

10…26.4V DC (23 points) at

60 °C (140 °F)

10…30V DC at 30 °C (86 °F)

10…26.4V DC at

65 °C (149 °F)

Number of inputs 8 8 16 32 8

Bus current draw, max 50 mA at 5V DC (0.25 W) 50 mA at 5V DC (0.25 W)

70 mA at 5V DC

(0.35 W)

(3)

170 mA at 5V DC

0 mA at 24V DC

110 mA at 5V DC

80 mA at 24V DC

Heat dissipation, max 2.0 W 3.7 W

4.3 W at 26.4V

5.4 W at 30V

(3)

5.4 W at 26.4V DC

6.8 W at 30V DC

5.0 W at 30V DC

4.4 W at 26.4V DC

(The Watts per point, plus

the min W, with all points

energized)

Signal delay, max

On delay: 20.0 ms

Off delay: 20.0 ms

On delay: 8.0 ms

Off delay: 8.0 ms

On delay: 8.0 ms

Off delay: 8.0 ms

On delay: 8.0 ms

Off delay: 8.0 ms

On delay: 8.0 ms

Off delay: 8.0 ms

Off-state voltage, max 20V AC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC

Off-state current, max 2.5 mA 1.5 mA 1.5 mA 1.0 mA 1.5 mA

On-state voltage, min 79V AC (min) 132V AC (max) 10V DC 10V DC 10V DC 10V DC

On-state current

5.0 mA min at 79V AC 47 Hz

12.0 mA nom. at 120V AC 60 Hz

16.0 mA max at 132V AC 63 Hz

2.0 mA min at 10V DC

8.0 mA nom. at 24V DC

12.0 mA max at 30V DC

2.0 mA min at 10V DC

8.0 mA nom. at 24V DC

12.0 mA max at 30V DC

1.6 mA min at 10V DC

2.0 mA min at 15V DC

5.7 mA max at 26.4V DC

6.5 mA max at 30.0V DC

10 mA at 5V DC

Inrush current, max 250 mA Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 250 mA

Nominal impedance

12 kΩ at 50 Hz

10 kΩ at 60 Hz

3 kΩ 3 kΩ 4.7 kΩ 3 kΩ

IEC input compatibility Type 1+ Type 1+ Type 1+ Type 1 Type 1+

Isolated groups

Group 1: inputs 0…7 (internally

connected commons)

Group 1: inputs 0…7

(internally connected

commons)

Group 1: inputs 0…7

Group 2: inputs 8…15

Group 1: Inputs 0…7

Group 2: Inputs 8…15

Group 3: Inputs 16…23

Group 4: Inputs 24…31

Group 1: inputs 0…3

Group 2: inputs 4…7

Input group to backplane

isolation

Verified by one of the

following dielectric tests:

1517V AC for 1 s or 2145V DC for

1 s

132V AC working voltage (IEC

Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Verified by one of the

following dielectric tests:

1200V ACAC for 1 s or 1697V

DC for 1 s

75V DC working voltage

(IEC Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Verified by one of the

following dielectric

tests: 1200V AC for 1 s or

1697V DC for 1 s

75V DC working voltage

(IEC Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Verified by one of the

following dielectric tests:

1200V AC for 2 s or 1697V

DC for 2 s

75V DC working voltage

(IEC Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Verified by one of the

following dielectric tests:

1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC

for 1 s

75V DC working voltage (IEC

Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Vendor I.D. code 1

Product type code 7

Product code 114 96 97 99 98

(1) Sinking/Sourcing Inputs – Sinking/sourcing describes the current flow between the I/O module and the field device. Sourcing I/O circuits supply (source) current to sinking field devices.

Sinking I/O circuits are driven by a current sourcing field device. Field devices connected to the negative side (DC Common) of the field power supply are sinking field devices. Field devices

connected to the positive side (+V) of the field supply are sourcing field devices.

(2) For derating chart, see MicroLogix 1762-IQ16 DC Input Module Installation Instructions, publication 1762-IN010

(3) Only applicable for series B and series C I/O modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 119

Appendix A Specifications

Output Specifications – 1762-OA8, 1762-OB8, 1762-OB16, 1762-OB32T, 1762-OV32T

Attribute 1762-OA8 1762-OB8 1762-OB16 1762-OB32T 1762-OV32T

Shipping weight, approx.

(with carton)

215 g (7.58 oz.) 210 g (7.41 oz.) 235 g (8.29 oz.) 200 g (7.05 oz.) 200 g (7.05 oz.)

Voltage category 100…240V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC sourcing 24V DC sinking

Operating voltage range 85…265V AC at 47…63 Hz 20.4…26.4V DC 20.4…26.4V DC 10.2…26.4V DC 10.2…26.4V DC

Number of outputs 8 8 16 32 32

Bus current draw, max

115 mA at 5V DC

(0.575 W)

115 mA at 5V DC (0.575 W) 175 mA at 5V DC (0.88 W)

175 mA at 5V DC

0 mA at 24V DC

175 mA at 5V DC

0 mA at 24V DC

Heat dissipation, max 2.9 W 1.61 W

2.9 W at 30 °C

(86

°F

)

2.1 W at 55 °C

(131

°F

)

3.4 W at 26.4 DC 2.7 W at 26.4V DC

Signal delay, max –

resistive load

On delay: 1/2 cycle

Off delay: 1/2 cycle

On delay: 0.1 ms

Off delay: 1.0 ms

On delay: 0.1 ms

Off delay: 1.0 ms

On delay: 0.5 ms

Off delay: 4.0 ms

On delay: 0.5 ms

Off delay: 4.0 ms

Off-state leakage current,

max

2 mA at 132V

2.5 mA at 265V

1.0 mA 1.0 mA 0.1 mA at 26.4V DC 0.1 mA at 26.4V DC

On-state current, min 10 mA 1.0 mA 1.0 mA 1.0 mA 1.0 mA

On-state voltage drop, max 1.5V at 0.5 A 1.0V DC 1.0V DC 0.3V DC at 0.5 A 0.3V DC at 0.5 A

Continuous current per

point, max

0.25 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

0.5 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

0.5 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

1.0 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

0.5 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

1.0 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

0.5 A at 60 °C (140 °F) 0.5 A at 60 °C (140 °F)

Continuous current per

common, max

1.0 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

2.0 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

4.0 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

8.0 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

4.0 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

8.0 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

2.0 A at 60 °C (140 °F) 2.0 A at 60 °C (140 °F)

Continuous current per

module, max

2.0 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

4.0 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

4.0 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

8.0 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

4.0 A at 55 °C (131 °F)

8.0 A at 30 °C (86 °F)

4.0 A at 60 °C (140 °F) 4.0 A at 60 °C (140 °F)

Surge current, max

5.0 A (Repeatability is once

every 2 s for a duration of

25 ms)

2.0 A (Repeatability is once

every 2 s at 55 °C (131 °F),

once every second at 30 °C

(86 °F) for a duration of

10 ms)

2.0 A (Repeatability is once

every 2 s at 55 °C (131 °F),

once every second at 30 °C

(86 °F) for a duration of

10 ms)

2.0 A (Repeatability is once

every 2 s at 60 °C (140 °F)

for 10 ms)

2.0 A (Repeatability is once

every 2 s at 60 °C (140 °F)

for 10 ms)

Isolated groups

Group 1: Outputs 0…3

Group 2: Outputs 4…7

Group 1: Outputs 0…7 Group 1: Outputs 0…15

Group 1: Outputs 0…15

Group 2: Outputs 16…31 (internally connected to

common)

Output group to backplane

isolation

Verified by one of the

following dielectric tests:

1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V

DC for 1 s

265V AC working voltage

(IEC Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V

AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s

75V DC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V

AC for 2 s or 1697V DC for 2 s

75V DC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Output group to output

group isolation

Verified by one of the

following dielectric tests:

1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V

DC for 1 s

265V AC working voltage

(IEC Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Not applicable

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V

AC for 2 s or 1697V DC for 2 s

75V DC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced

insulation)

Vendor I.D. code 1

Product type code 7

Product code 119 101 1

100 102

Output Specifications – 1762-OW8, 1762-OW16, 1762-OX6I, 1762-IQ8OW6

Attribute 1762-OW8 1762-OW16 1762-OX6I 1762-IQ8OW6

Shipping weight, approx. (with

carton)

228 g (0.50 lbs.) 285 g (0.63 lbs.) 220 g (0.485 lbs) 280 g (0.62 lbs.)

Voltage category AC/DC normally open relay AC/DC normally open relay AC/DC Type C Relay AC/DC normally open relay

Operating voltage range

5…265V AC

5…125V DC

5…265V AC

5…125V DC

5…265V AC

5…125V DC

5…265V AC

5…125V DC

Number of outputs 8 16 6 6

Bus current draw, max

80 mA at 5V DC (0.40 W)

90 mA at 24V DC (2.16 W)

140 mA at 5V DC (0.70 W)

(1)

180 mA at 24V DC (4.32 W)

(1)

110 mA at 5V DC (0.55 W)

110 mA at 24V DC (2.64 W)

110 mA at 5V DC

80 mA at 24V DC

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

Heat dissipation, max 2.9 W

6.1 W

(1)

2.8 W

5.0 W at 30V DC

4.4 W at 26.4V DC (The Watts

per point, plus the min W, with

all points energized)

Signal delay, max – resistive load

On Delay: 10 ms

Off Delay: 10 ms

On Delay: 10 ms

Off Delay: 10 ms

On Delay: 10 ms (max) 6 ms

(typical)

Off Delay: 20 ms (max)

12 ms (typical)

On-delay: 10 ms (max)

Off-delay: 10 ms (max)

Off-state leakage, max 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA

On-state current, min 10 mA 10 mA 100 mA 10 mA

On-state voltage drop, max Not Applicable

Continuous current per point, max 2.5 A. See Table 25

7 A

See Table 26

2.5 A

See Table 25

Continuous current per common,

max

8 A 8 A

7 A

See Table 26

8 A

Continuous current per module, max 16 A 16 A

30 A

See Table 27

8 A

Surge current, max See Table 25 See Table 26 See Table 25

Isolated groups

Group 1: Outputs 0…3

Group 2: Outputs 4…7

Group 1: Outputs 0…7

Group 2: Outputs 8…15

All 6 Outputs Individually

Isolated

Group 3: Outputs 0…5

Output group to backplane isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V AC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Output group to output group

isolation

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s

265V AC working voltage (basic insulation)

150V AC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

Vendor I.D. code 1

Product type code 7

Product code 1

124 98

(1) Only applicable for series B and series C I/O modules.

Output Specifications – 1762-OW8, 1762-OW16, 1762-OX6I, 1762-IQ8OW6 (Continued)

Attribute 1762-OW8 1762-OW16 1762-OX6I 1762-IQ8OW6

Table 25 - Relay Contact Ratings – 1762-OW8, 1762-OW16, and 1762-IQ8OW6

Maximum Volts Amperes Continuous

Amperes Voltamperes

Make Break Make Break

240V AC

2.5 A

(1)

(1) 1.5 A above 40 °C (104 °F).

7.5 A 0.75 A 1800VA 180VA

120V AC

2.5 A

(1)

15 A 1.5 A 1800VA 180VA

125V DC 1.0 A

0.22 A

(2)

(2) For DC voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28VA by the

applied DC voltage. For example, 28VA/48V DC = 0.58 A. For DC voltage applications less than 14V, the make/break ratings for

relay contacts cannot exceed 2 A.

28VA

24V DC 2.0 A

1.2 A

(2)

Table 26 - Relay Contact Ratings 1762-OX6I

Maximum Volts

Continuous Amps per

Point (Max)

(1)

(1) The continuous current per module must be limited so that the module power does not exceed 1440VA.

Amperes

(2)

(2) Surge Suppression – Connecting surge suppressors across your external inductive load will extend the life of the relay

contacts. For additional details, see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1

Voltamperes

Make Break Make Break

240V AC 5.0 A 15 A 1.5 A

3600VA 360VA

120V AC

7.0 A

(3)

(3) 6 A in ambient temperatures above 40 °C (104.°F)

30 A 3.0 A

125V DC 2.5 A 0.4 A

50VA

(4)

(4) DC Make/Break Voltamperes must be limited to 50VA for DC voltages between 28V DC and 125V DC. DC Make/Break

Voltamperes below 28V DC are limited by the 7 A Make/Break current limit.

24V DC

7.0 A

(3)

7.0 A

168VA

(4)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 121

Appendix A Specifications

Figure 85 - Relays Used vs. Maximum Current per Relay (24V DC) 1762-OX6I

Table 27 - Module Load Ratings 1762-OX6I

Volts (Max) Controlled Load (Current) per Module (Max)

240V AC 6 A

120V AC

12 A

(1)

(1) Current per relay is limited to 6 A at ambient temperatures above 40 °C (104.°F).

125V DC 11.5 A

24V DC

30 A

(2)

(2) 24 A in ambient temperatures above 40 °C (104.°F). Limited by ambient temperature and the number of relays controlling

loads. See Figure 85.

123

45 6

Number of Relays Controlling Loads

Maximum Current per Relay (Amps)

Ambient Temperature

below 40 °C (104.°F)

Ambient Temperature

above 40 °C (104.°F)

Environmental Specifications

Attribute Value

Temperature, operating

IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),

IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),

IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock):

-20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +65 °C (-4 °F ≤ Ta ≤ +149 °F)

Temperature, ambient, max 65 °C (140 °F)

Temperature, surrounding air, max 65 °C (140 °F)

Temperature, nonoperating

IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold),

IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat),

IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock):

-40…+85 °C (-40…+185 °F)

Relative humidity

IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Unpackaged Damp Heat):

5…95% noncondensing

Vibration

IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating):

5 g @ 10…500 Hz

Shock, operating

IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):

30 g - Panel mounted

Shock, nonoperating

IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock):

30 g - Panel mounted

40 g - DIN rail mounted

Emissions IEC 61000-6-4

ESD immunity

EC 61000-4-2:

4 kV contact discharges

8 kV air discharges

Radiated RF immunity

IEC 61000-4-3:

10V/m with 1 kHz sine wave 80% AM from 80…6000 MHz

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

Analog I/O Modules

EFT/B immunity

IEC 61000-4-4:

±2 kV @ 5 kHz on power ports

±2 kV @ 5 kHz on signal ports

±1 kV @ 5 kHz on communication ports

Surge transient immunity

IEC 61000-4-5:

±2 kV line-line(DM) and ±4 kV line-earth(CM) on AC power ports

±500V line-line(DM) and ±1 kV line-earth(CM) on signal ports

±1 kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports

±2 kV line-earth(CM) on communication ports

Conducted RF immunity

IEC 61000-4-6:

10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80% AM from 150 kHz…80 MHz

Environmental Specifications (Continued)

Attribute Value

Certifications

Certification (when product is marked)

(1)

Value

c-UL-us

UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for U.S. and Canada. See UL File E322657.

UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group A, B, C, D Hazardous Locations, certified for U.S. and Canada. See UL File E334470.

European Union 2014/30/EU EMC Directive, compliant with:

EN 61326-1; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements

EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity

EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions

EN 61131-2; Programmable Controllers (Clause 8, Zone A & B)

European Union 2014/35/EU LVD, compliant with:

EN 61131-2; Programmable Controllers (Clause 11)

European Union 2011/62/EU RoHS, compliant with:

EN IEC 63000; Technical Documentation

RCM

Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:

EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emmissions

Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment, compliant with:

Article 58-2 of Radio Waves Act, Clause 3

UKCA

2016 No. 1091 – Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations

2016 No. 1101 – Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations

2012 No. 3032 – Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations

(1) See the Product Certification link at rok.auto/certifications for Declaration of Conformity, Certificates, and other certification details.

Common Specifications – 1762-IF2OF2, 1762-IF4, 1762-IR4, 1762-IT4, 1762-OF4

Attribute 1762-IF2OF2, 1762-IF4, 1762-IR4, 1762-IT4, 1762-OF4

Dimensions

HxWxD

90 x 87 x 40 mm

Height including mounting tabs is 110 mm

(3.54 x 3.43 x 1.58 in.)

Height including mounting tabs is 4.33 in.

Module power status indicator On: Indicates power is applied

Recommended cable

Belden 8761 (shielded)

For 1762-IT4, shielded thermocouple extension wire for the specific type of thermocouple you are using. Follow the

thermocouple manufacturer’s recommendations.

General Specifications – 1762-IF2OF2, 1762-IF4, 1762-OF4, 1762-IR4, 1762-IT4

Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-IF4 1762-OF4 1762-IR4 1762-IT4

Shipping weight,

approx. (with carton)

240 g (0.53 lbs.) 235 g (0.517 lbs.) 260 g (0.57 lbs.) 220 g (0.53 lbs.)

Bus current draw, max

40 mA @ 5V DC

105 mA @ 24V DC

40 mA @ 5V DC

50 mA @ 24V DC

40 mA @ 5V DC

165 mA @ 24V DC

40 mA @ 5V DC

50 mA @ 24V DC

40 mA @ 5V DC

50 mA @ 24V DC

Analog normal

operating range

Voltage: 0…10V DC

Current: 4…20 mA

Voltage: -10…+10V DC

Current: 4…20 mA

Voltage 0…10V DC

Current: 4…20 mA

Not applicable Not applicable

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 123

Appendix A Specifications

Full scale

(1)

analog

ranges

Voltage: 0…10.5V DC

Current: 0…21 mA

Voltage: -10.5…+10.5V

Current: -21…+21 mA

Voltage:0…10.5V DC

Current: 0…21 mA

Not applicable Not applicable

Resolution 12 bits (unipolar)

15 bits (bipolar)

(2)

12 bits (unipolar)

Input filter and configuration

dependent

15 bits plus sign

Repeatability

(3)

±0.12%

(2)

±0.12%

(2)

±0.12%

(2)

±0.1 °C (±0.18 °F) for Ni and NiFe

±0.2 °C (±0.36 °F)…±0.2 °C

(±0.36 °F) for other RTD inputs

±0.04 ohm for 150 ohm

resistances

±0.2 ohm for other resistances

See Table 28

Input and output group

to system isolation

30V AC/30V DC rated working voltage

(4)

(N.E.C. Class 2 required)

(IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

type test: 500V AC or 707V DC for 1 minute

30V AC/30V DC rated working

voltage

(IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)

type test: 500V AC or 707V DC for 1

minute

30V AC/30V DC working voltage

type test: 500V AC or 707V DC for 1

minute

30V AC/30V DC

working voltage

qualification test:

720V DC for 1 minute

Vendor I.D. code 1 1 1 1 1

Product type code 10 10 10 10 10

Product code 75 67 66 65 64

(1) The overrange or underrange flag comes on when the normal operating range (over/under) is exceeded. The module continues to convert the analog input up to the maximum full-scale

range.

(2) Only applicable to series B I/O and series C I/O modules.

(3) Repeatability is the ability of the module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same signal.

(4) Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the terminals with respect to earth ground.

General Specifications – 1762-IF2OF2, 1762-IF4, 1762-OF4, 1762-IR4, 1762-IT4 (Continued)

Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-IF4 1762-OF4 1762-IR4 1762-IT4

Input Specifications – 1762-IF2OF2, 1762-IF4, 1762-IR4, 1762-IT4

Attribute 1762-IF2OF2 1762-IF4 1762-IR4 1762-IT4

Number of inputs 2 differential (unipolar) 4 differential (bipolar) 4

4 input channels plus 1 CJC

sensor

Update time (typical) 2.5 ms

130, 250, 290, 450, 530 ms

(selectable)

Input filter and configuration

dependent

A/D converter type Successive approximation Successive approximation Delta-Sigma Delta-Sigma

Common mode voltage range

(1)

±27V ±27V NA ±10V

Common mode rejection

(2)

> 55 dB at 50 Hz and 60 Hz > 55 dB at 50 Hz and 60 Hz

>110 dB at 50 Hz (with 10 Hz or

60 Hz filter)

>110 dB at 50 Hz (with 10 Hz or

60 Hz filter)

Non-linearity (in percent full

scale)

±0.12%

(3)

±0.12%

(3)

±0.05% NA

Typical overall accuracy

(4)

±0.55% full scale at

-20…+65 °C (-4…+149 °F)

(3)

±0.3% full scale at 25 °C (77 °F)

±0.32% full scale at

-20…+65 °C (-4…+149 °F)

(3)

±0.24% full scale at 25 °C (77 °F)

±0.5 °C (0.9 °F) for Pt 385 NA

Input impedance

Voltage Terminal: 200 kΩ

Current Terminal: 250 Ω

Voltage Terminal: 200 kΩ

Current Terminal: 275 Ω

>10 MΩ >10 MΩ

Current input protection ±32 mA ±32 mA NA NA

Voltage input protection ±30V ±30V NA NA

Channel diagnostics

Over or under range or open

circuit condition by bit

reporting for analog inputs

Over or under range or open

circuit condition by bit reporting

for analog inputs

Over or under range or open

circuit condition by bit reporting

for analog inputs

Over or under range or open

circuit condition by bit reporting

for analog inputs

(1) For proper operation, both the plus and minus input terminals must be within ±27V (±10V for 1762-IT4) of analog common.

(2) V

= 1 V

pk-pk

(3) Only applicable for series B and series C I/O modules.

(4) V

= 0 (includes offset, gain, non-linearity, and repeatability error terms)

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

Input Specifications 1762-IR4

Attribute 1762-IR4

Input types

100 Ω Platinum 385

200 Ω Platinum 385

500 Ω Platinum 385

1000 Ω Platinum 385

100 Ω Platinum 3916

200 Ω Platinum 3916

500 Ω Platinum 3916

1000 Ω Platinum 3916

10 Ω Copper 426

120 Ω Nickel 672

120 Ω Nickel 618

604 Ω Nickel-Iron 518

0...150 Ω

0...500 Ω

0...1000 Ω

0...3000 Ω

Heat dissipation 1.5 Total Watts (The Watts per point, plus the minimum Watts, with all points enabled)

Normal mode rejection ratio

70 dB minimum at 50 Hz with the 10 Hz or 50 Hz filter selected

70 dB minimum at 60 Hz with the 10 Hz or 60 Hz filter selected

Typical accuracy [Auto-calibration enabled] at 25

°C (77 °F) ambient with module operating

temperature at 25 °C (77 °F)

(1)

±0.5 °C (0.90 °F) for Pt 385

±0.4 °C (0.72 °F) for Pt 3916

±0.2 °C (0.36 °F) for Ni

±0.3 °C (0.54 °F) for NiFe

±0.6 °C (1.08 °F) for Cu

±0.15 Ω for 150 Ω range

±0.5 Ω for 500 Ω range

±1.0 Ω for 1000 Ω range

±1.5 Ω for 3000 Ω range

Typical accuracy [Auto-calibration enabled]

at 0…55 °C (32…131 °F)

(1)

±0.9 °C (1.62 °F) for Pt 385

±0.8 °C (1.40 °F) for Pt 3916

±0.4 °C (0.72 °F) for Ni

±0.5 °C (0.90 °F) for NiFe

±1.1 °C (1.98 °F) for Cu

±0.25 Ω for 150 Ω range

±0.8 Ω for 500 Ω range

±1.5 Ω for 1000 Ω range

±2.5 Ω for 3000 Ω range

Accuracy drift at 0…55 °C (32…131 °F)

±0.026 °C/°C (0.026 °F/°F) for Pt 385

±0.023 °C/°C (0.023 °F/°F) for Pt 3916

±0.012 °C/°C (0.012 °F/°F) for Ni

±0.015 °C/°C (0.015 °F/°F) for NiFe

±0.032 °C/°C (0.032 °F/°F) for Cu

±0.007 Ω/°C (0.012 Ω/°F) for 150 Ω range

±0.023 Ω/°C (0.041 Ω/°F) for 500 Ω range

±0.043 Ω/°C (0.077 Ω/°F) for 1000 Ω range

±0.07 Ω/°C (0.130 Ω/°F) for 3000 Ω range

Excitation current source 0.5 mA and 1.0 mA selectable per channel

Open-circuit detection time

(2)

6…1212 ms

Input channel configuration

Via configuration software screen or the user program (by writing a unique bit pattern into the module’s

configuration file). See your controller’s user manual to determine if user program configuration is supported.

Calibration

The module performs auto-calibration on channel enable and on a configuration change between channels. You

can also program the module to calibrate every 5 minutes.

Maximum overload at input terminals ±35V DC continuous

Cable impedance, max 25 Ω − Operating with >25 Ω reduces accuracy.

Channel to channel isolation ±10V DC

(1) Accuracy is dependent upon the Analog/Digital converter filter rate selection, excitation current selection, data format, and input noise.

(2) Open-circuit detection time is equal to channel update time.

Input Specifications 1762-IT4

Attribute Value

Heat dissipation 1.5 Total Watts (The Watts per point, plus the minimum Watts, with all points energized)

Response speed per channel Input filter and configuration dependent

Rated working voltage

(1)

30V AC/30V DC

Normal mode rejection ratio

85 dB (minimum) at 50 Hz (with 10 Hz or 50 Hz filter)

85 dB (minimum) at 60 Hz (with 10 Hz or 60 Hz filter)

Cable impedance, max 25 Ω (for specified accuracy)

Open-circuit detection time

7 ms…1.515 s

(2)

Calibration

The module performs auto-calibration upon power-up and whenever a channel is enabled. You can also

program the module to calibrate every 5 minutes.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 125

Appendix A Specifications

CJC accuracy ±1.3 °C (±2.34 °F)

Maximum overload at input terminals

±35V DC continuous

(3)

Input channel configuration

Via configuration software screen or the user program (by writing a unique bit pattern into the module’s

configuration file)

(1) Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the input terminal, including the input signal and the value that floats above ground potential (for example,

30V DC input signal and 20V DC potential above ground).

(2) Open-circuit detection time is equal to the module scan time, which is based on the number of enabled channels, the filter frequency of each channel, and whether cyclic calibration is

enabled.

(3) Maximum current input is limited due to input impedance.

Input Specifications 1762-IT4 (Continued)

Attribute Value

Table 28 - 1762-IT4 Repeatability at 25 °C (77 °F)

(1)

(2)

(1) Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same input

signal.

(2) Repeatability at any other temperature in the 0…60 °C (32…140 °F) range is the same as long as the temperature is stable.

Input Type Repeatability for 10 Hz Filter

Thermocouple J ±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F]

Thermocouple N (-110…+1300 °C [-166…+2372 °F]) ±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F]

Thermocouple N (-210…-110 °C [-346…-166 °F]) ±0.25 °C [±0.45 °F]

Thermocouple T (-170…+400 °C [-274…+752 °F]) ±0 .1 °C [±0.18 °F]

Thermocouple T (-270…-170 °C [-454…-274 °F]) ±1.5 °C [±2.7 °F]

Thermocouple K (-270…+1370 °C [-454…+2498 °F]) ±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F]

Thermocouple K (-270…-170 °C [-454…-274 °F]) ±2.0 °C [±3.6 °F]

Thermocouple E (-220…+1000 °C [-364…+1832 °F]) ±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F]

Thermocouple E (-270…-220 °C [-454…-364 °F]) ±1.0 °C [±1.8 °F]

Thermocouples S and R ±0.4 °C [±0.72 °F]

Thermocouple C ±0.2 °C [±0.36 °F]

Thermocouple B ±0.7 °C [±1.26 °F]

±50 mV ±6 µV

±100 mV ±6 µV

1762-IT4 Accuracy

Input Type

(1)

With Auto-calibration Enabled Without Auto-calibration

Maxiumum Accuracy for 10 Hz, 50 Hz, and 60 Hz Filters

Maximum Temperature Drift

(2)

@ 25 °C [77 °F]

Ambient

@ 0…60 °C [32…140 °F]

Ambient

@ 0…60 °C [32…140 °F]

Ambient

Thermocouple J (-210…+1200 °C [-346…+2192 °F]) ±0.6 °C [±1.1 °F] ±0.9 °C [±1.7 °F] ±0.0218 °C/ °C [±0.0218 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple N (-200…+1300 °C [-328…+2372 °F]) ±1 °C [±1.8 °F] ±1.5 °C [±2.7 °F] ±0.0367 °C/ °C [±0.0367 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple N (-210…-200 °C [-346…-328 °F]) ±1.2 °C [±2.2 °F] ±1.8 °C [±3.3 °F] ±0.0424 °C/ °C [±0.0424 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple T (-230…+400 °C [-382…+752 °F]) ±1 °C [±1.8 °F] ±1.5 °C [±2.7 °F] ±0.0349 °C/ °C [±0.0349 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple T (-270…-230 °C [-454…-382 °F]) ±5.4 °C [±9.8 °F] ±7.0 °C [±12.6 °F] ±0.3500 °C/ °C [±0.3500 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple K (-230…+1370 °C [-382…+2498 °F]) ±1 °C [±1.8 °F] ±1.5 °C [±2.7 °F] ±0.4995 °C/ °C [±0.4995 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple K (-270…-225 °C [-454…-373 °F]) ±7.5 °C [±13.5 °F] ±10 °C [± 18 °F] ±0.0378 °C/ °C [±0.0378 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple E (-210…+1000 °C [-346…+1832 °F]) ±0.5 °C [±0.9 °F] ±0.8 °C [±1.5 °F] ±0.0199 °C/ °C [±0.0199 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple E (-270…-210 °C [-454…-346 °F]) ±4.2 °C [±7.6 °F] ±6.3 °C [±11.4 °F] ±0.2698 °C/ °C [±0.2698 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple R ±1.7 °C [±3.1 °F] ±2.6 °C [±4.7 °F] ±0.0613 °C/ °C [±0.0613 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple S ±1.7 °C [±3.1 °F] ±2.6 °C [± 4.7 °F] ±0.0600 °C/ °C [±0.0600 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple C ±1.8 °C [±3.3 °F] ±3.5 °C [±6.3 °F] ±0.0899 °C/ °C [±0.0899 °F/ °F]

Thermocouple B ±3.0 °C [±5.4 °F] ±4.5 °C [±8.1 °F] ±0.1009 °C/ °C [±0.1009 °F/ °F]

±50 mV ±15 µV ±25 µV ±0.44 µV/ °C [±0.80 µV/ °F]

±100 mV ±20 µV ±30 µV ±0.69 µV/ °C [±01.25 µV/ °F]

(1) The module uses the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) ITS-90 standard for thermocouple linearization.

(2) Temperature drift with auto-calibration is slightly better than without auto-calibration.

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

For more detailed 1762-IT4 accuracy information, see the MicroLogix 1200

Thermocouple/mV Input Module User Manual, publication 1762-UM002.

Output Specifications – 1762-IF2OF2, 1762-OF4

Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-OF4

Number of outputs 2 single-ended (unipolar)

4 single-ended (unipolar)

(2)

Update time (typical) 4.5 ms 2.5 ms

D/A converter type Resistor string R-2R ladder voltage switching

Resistive load on current output 0…500 Ω (includes wire resistance) 0…500 Ω (includes wire resistance)

Load range on voltage output > 1 kΩ > 1 kΩ

Reactive load, current output < 0.1 mH < 0.1 mH

Reactive load, voltage output < 1 µF < 1 µF

Typical overall accuracy

(1)

±1.17% full scale @ -20…+65 °C

(2)

±0.5% full scale @ 25 °C

±1.17% full scale @ -20…+65 °C

(2)

±0.5% full scale @ 25 °C

Output ripple range 0…500 Hz

(referred to output range)

< ±0.1% < ±0.1%

Non-linearity (in percent full scale)

< ±0.59%

(2)

< ±0.59%

(2)

Open and short-circuit protection Continuous Continuous

Output protection ±32 mA ±32 mA

(1) Includes offset, gain, non-linearity, and repeatability error terms.

(2) Only applicable to series B and series C I/O modules.

Table 29 - Valid Input/Output Data Word Formats/Ranges for 1762-IF2OF2

Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range RAW/Proportional Data Scaled-for-PID

0…10V DC

10.5V DC 32,760 16,380

0.0V DC 0 0

4…20 mA

21.0 mA 32,760 16,380

20.0 mA 31,200 15,600

4.0 mA 6,240 3,120

0.0 mA 0 0

Environmental Specifications

Attribute Value

Temperature, storage -40…+85 °C (-40…+185 °F)

Temperature, operating

-20…+65 °C (-4…+149 °F)

(1)

Operating humidity 5…95% noncondensing

Operating altitude 2000 m (6561 ft.)

Vibration Operating: 10…500 Hz, 5 g, 0.030 in. max peak-to-peak

Shock Operating: 30 g

Emissions IEC 61000-6-4

ESD immunity

IEC 61000-4-2:

6 kV contact discharges

8 kV air discharges

Radiated RF immunity

IEC 61000-4-3:

10V/m with 1 kHz sine wave 80% AM from 80…1000 MHz

3V/m with 1 kHz sine wave 80% AM from 1.4…2.0 GHz

1V/m with 1 kHz sine wave 80% AM from 2.0…2.7 GHz

EFT/B immunity

IEC 61000-4-4:

±2 kV @ 5 kHz on signal ports

Surge transient immunity

IEC 61000-4-5:

±1 kV line-earth(CM) on shielded ports

Conducted RF immunity

IEC 61000-4-6:

10V rms with 1 Hz sine wave 80% AM from 150 kHz…80 MHz

(2)

(1) See the module’s Installation Instruction for exact operating temperature range.

(2) For grounded thermocouples, the 10V level is reduced to 3V.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 127

Appendix A Specifications

Certifications

Certification (when product is marked)

(1)

Value

UL UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group A, B, C, D Hazardous Locations

cUL UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group A, B, C, D Hazardous Locations, certified for Canada.

European Union 2014/30/EU EMC Directive, compliant with:

EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity

EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions

EN 61131-2; Programmable Controllers (Clause 8, Zone A & B)

RCM

Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:

AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions

Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment, compliant with:

Article 58-2 of Radio Waves Act, Clause 3

(1) See the Product Certification link at rok.auto/certifications for Declaration of Conformity, Certificates, and other certification details.

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix A Specifications

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 129

Appendix B

Replacement Parts

MicroLogix 1100

Replacement Kits

Table 30 provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog number.

Lithium Battery (1763-BA)

Installation

Follow the procedure below to ensure proper replaceable battery installation.

1. Insert a battery into the battery pocket with wires facing up.

2. Insert the battery wire connector into the battery connector.

3. Secure the battery connector wires along the wire guide, as shown in Figure 86

Figure 86 - Replaceable Battery Wire Connection

Table 30 - MicroLogix 1100 Controller Replacement Parts

Description Catalog Number

Lithium Battery 1763-BA

IMPORTANT When the controller’s Battery Low indicator is lit, check whether the

battery wire connector is connected correctly or replace the

replaceable battery with a new one immediately. When the indicator

turns on, it means that either the battery is disconnected, or that the

battery requires replacement. The controller is designed to operate for

up to 2 weeks, from the time that the indicator first turns on. We

recommend that you replace the battery immediately when the

indicator turns on.

ESC OK

Wire guide

Battery wires

Replaceable

battery

Replaceable battery pocket

Battery wire

connector

Battery connector

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix B Replacement Parts

Battery Handling

Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards.

• Use only for the intended operation.

• Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedures.

• Do not ship on passenger aircraft.

Storage

Store lithium batteries in a cool, dry environment, typically 20…25 °C (68…77 °F) and 40…60%

humidity. Store the batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original

container, away from flammable materials.

Transportation

One or Two Batteries

Each battery contains 0.23 g (0.008 oz.) of lithium. Therefore, up to two batteries can be

shipped together within the United States without restriction. Regulations governing shipment

to or within other countries may differ.

Three or More Batteries

Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped together within the

United States are specified by the Department of Transportation (DOT) in the Code of Federal

Regulations, CFR49, “Transportation.” An exemption to these regulations, DOT - E7052, covers

the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as flammable solids. This exemption

authorizes transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle, rail freight, cargo vessel, and cargo-

only aircraft, providing certain conditions are met. Transport by passenger aircraft is not

permitted.

A special provision of DOT-E7052 (11th Rev., October 21, 1982, par. 8-a) provides that:

“Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them

pursuant to the provisions of 49 CFR 173.22a in any of these packages authorized in this

exemption including those in which they were received.”

The Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 173.22a, relates to the use of packaging authorized

under exemptions. In part, it requires that you must maintain a copy of the exemption at each

facility where the packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the exemption.

Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific regulation of the

countries involved or to regulations endorsed by those countries, such as the IATA Articles

Regulations of the International Air Transport Association, Geneva, Switzerland.

• Do not charge the batteries. An explosion could result or the cells could

overheat causing burns.

• Do not open, puncture, crush, or otherwise mutilate the batteries. A possibility

of an explosion exists and/or toxic, corrosive, and flammable liquids would be

exposed.

• Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high temperatures. Do not attempt

to solder batteries. An explosion could result.

• Do not short positive and negative terminals together. Excessive heat can

build up and cause severe burns.

IMPORTANT Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are periodically

revised. See www.dot.gov

for the latest shipping information.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 131

Appendix B Replacement Parts

Disposal

For disposal, batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance with transportation

regulations, to a proper disposal site. The U.S. Department of Transportation authorizes

shipment of “Lithium batteries for disposal” by motor vehicle only in regulation 173.1015 of CFR

49 (effective January 5, 1983). For additional information contact:

U.S. Department of Transportation

Research and Special Programs Administration

400 Seventh Street, S.W.

Washington, D.C. 20590

Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no regulations specific to

lithium batteries, the material contained may be considered toxic, reactive, or corrosive. The

person disposing of the material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so. State and

local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials.

For a lithium battery product safety data sheet, contact the manufacturer:

Sanyo Energy Corporation Tadarand U.S. Battery Division

2001 Sanyo Avenue 2 Seaview Blvd.

San Diego, CA 92173 Port Washington, NY 11050

(619) 661-4801 (516) 621-4980

ATTENTION: Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash

collection. Explosion or violent rupture is possible. Batteries should be

collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short-circuiting,

compacting, or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal.

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix B Replacement Parts

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 133

Appendix C

Troubleshoot Your System

Understand the Controller

Status Indicators

The MicroLogix 1100 controller provides three groups of status indicators:

• The LED status indicators on the top of the controller

• The status indicators on the LCD

• The I/O status indicators on the LCD

Together they provide a mechanism to determine the current status of the controller if a

programming device is not present or available.

Controller Status Indicators

Figure 87 - Controller Status Indicator Location

Table 31 - Controller Status Indicators

Status Indicator Color Indicates

POWER

Off No input power or power error condition

Steady green Power on

RUN

Off Not executing the user program

Steady green Executing the user program in run mode

Flashing green Memory module transfer occurring

FAULT

Off No fault detected

Flashing red Application fault detected

Steady red Controller hardware faulted

FORCE

Off No forces installed

Steady amber Forces installed

Flashing amber Forces installed in force files, but forcing is disabled

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix C Troubleshoot Your System

Status Indicators on the LCD

Figure 88 - Status Indicators on the LCD

I/O Status Indicators on the LCD

Figure 89 - I/O Status Indicators on the LCD

Table 32 - Status Indicators on the LCD

Indicator Color Indicates

COMM 0

Off (empty rectangle) Not transmitting through RS-232/RS-485 port (Channel 0)

On (solid rectangle) Transmitting through RS-232/RS-485 port (Channel 0)

COMM 1

Off (empty rectangle) Not transmitting through Ethernet port (Channel 1)

On (solid rectangle) Transmitting through Ethernet port (Channel 1)

DCOMM

(1)

(1) When using a MicroLogix 1100 controller, the DCOMM LED applies only to Channel 0.

Off (empty rectangle) Configured communications

On (solid rectangle) Default communications

BAT. LO

Off (empty rectangle) Battery level is acceptable

On (solid rectangle) Battery low

U-MSG

Off (empty rectangle) Default display mode

On (solid rectangle) Customized display mode

Table 33 - I/O Status Indicators on the LCD

Indicator Color Indicates

INPUTS

(1)

(1) To view the status of inputs and outputs on the LCD, you need to enter the I/O LED mode screen using the LCD menu. See I/O

Status on page 76 for more information.

Off (empty rectangle) Input is not energized

On (solid rectangle) Input is energized (terminal status)

OUTPUTS

Off (empty rectangle) Output is not energized

On (solid rectangle) Output is engerized (logic status)

COMM0

COMM1

DCOMM

BAT

U-MSG

Output status indicators (6)

Input status indicators (10)

I/O LED screen on the LCD

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 135

Appendix C Troubleshoot Your System

Normal Operation

The POWER and RUN status indicators are On. If forcing is enabled and forces are installed in

the I/O force files, the FORCE status indicator turns on and remains on until all forces are

removed. If forcing is disabled and forces are installed in the I/O force files, the FORCE status

indicator flashes and remains flashing until all forces are removed from the I/O force files.

Error Conditions

If an error exists within the controller, the controller status indicators operate as described in

Table 34

Table 34 - Error Conditions

If the LEDS Indicate The Following Error Exists Probable Cause Recommended Action

All LEDs off

No input power or power

supply error

No line power Verify proper line voltage and connections to the controller.

Power supply overloaded

This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is overloaded when output

loading and temperature varies.

Power and FAULT

LEDs on solid

Hardware faulted

Processor hardware error Cycle power. Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the error persists.

Loose wiring Verify connections to the controller.

Power LED on and

FAULT LED flashing

Application fault

Hardware/software major

fault detected

For error codes and Status File information, see MicroLogix 1100 Programmable

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

RUN, FORCE, and

FAULT LEDs all

flashing

Operating system fault

Missing or corrupt operating

system

See Missing or Corrupt OS LED Pattern on page 144.

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix C Troubleshoot Your System

Controller Error Recovery

Model

Figure 90 helps you diagnose software and hardware problems in the micro controller. The

model provides common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system. See the

recommended pages within the model for further help.

Figure 90 - Controller Error Recovery Model

Identify the error code and

description.

See Table 34

for probable cause

and recommended action.

Clear the fault.

Correct the condition causing

the fault.

Return controller to RUN or

any of the REM test modes.

Test and verify system operation.

See Table 34

for probable

cause and recommended

action.

Is the Fault LED on?

Is the RUN LED on?

Is the Power LED on?

Are the wire

connections tight?

Tighten wire connections.

Does the controller

have power supplied?

Check the power.

See Table 34

for probable

cause and recommended

action.

Is an input LED

accurately showing

status?

See Table 34

for probably

cause and recommended

action.

Is the error

hardware related?

Start

Yes

End

Yes

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 137

Appendix C Troubleshoot Your System

Analog Expansion I/O

Diagnostics and

Troubleshooting

Module Operation and Channel Operation

The module performs operations at two levels:

•Module level

• Channel level

Module-level operations include functions such as power-up, configuration, and

communication with the controller.

Internal diagnostics are performed at both levels of operation. Both module hardware and

channel configuration error conditions are reported to the controller. Channel overrange or

underrange conditions are reported in the module’s input data table. Module hardware errors

are reported in the controller’s I/O status file. See MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers

Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

for more information.

When a fault condition is detected, the analog outputs are reset to zero.

Power-up Diagnostics

At module power-up, a series of internal diagnostic tests are performed.

Critical and Non-critical Errors

Non-critical module errors are recoverable. Channel errors (overrange or underrange errors)

are non-critical. Non-critical error conditions are indicated in the module input data table.

Non-critical configuration errors are indicated by the extended error code.

Critical module errors are conditions that prevent normal or recoverable operation of the

system. When these types of errors occur, the system leaves the run mode of operation.

Critical and non-critical module errors are indicated in Table 38

Module Error Definition Table

Analog module errors are expressed in two fields as four-digit Hex format with the most

significant digit as “don’t care” and irrelevant. The two fields are “Module Error” and “Extended

Error Information”. The structure of the module error data is shown in Table 36

Module Error Field

The purpose of the module error field is to classify module errors into three distinct groups, as

described in Table 37. The type of error determines what kind of information exists in the

extended error information field. These types of module errors are typically reported in the

controller’s I/O status file. See MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set

Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

for more information.

Table 35 - Module Status LED State Table

If Module Status LED is Indicated Condition Corrective Action

On Proper Operation No action is required.

Off Module Fault

Cycle power. If condition persists, replace the module.

Call your local distributor or Allen-Bradley for assistance.

Table 36 - Module Error Table

“Don’t Care” Bits Module Error Extended Error Information

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0000000000000000

Hex Digit 4 Hex Digit 3 Hex Digit 2 Hex Digit 1

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix C Troubleshoot Your System

Extended Error Information Field

Check the extended error information field when a non-zero value is present in the module

error field. See Table 38

and Table 39.

Hardware Errors

General or module-specific hardware errors are indicated by module error code 2. See

Table 38 and Table 39.

Configuration Errors

If you set the fields in the configuration file to invalid or unsupported values, the module

ignores the invalid configuration, generates a non-critical error, and keeps operating with the

previous configuration.

Table 38

and Table 39 list the configuration error codes defined for the module.

Error Codes

Table 37 - Module Error Types

Error Type

Module Error Field Value

Bits 11 through 09 (Binary)

Description

No Errors 000 No error is present. The extended error field holds no additional information.

Hardware Errors 001 General and specific hardware error codes are specified in the extended error information field.

Configuration Errors 010

Module-specific error codes are indicated in the extended error field. These error codes correspond to

options that you can change directly. For example, the input range or input filter selection.

If no errors are present in the module error field, the extended error information

field is set to zero.

Table 38 - Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF2OF2

Error Type

Hex Equivalent

(1)

Module Error

Code

Extended Error

Information Code

Error Description

Binary Binary

No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error

General Common

Hardware Error

X200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error; no additional information

X201 001 0 0000 0001 Power-up reset state

Hardware-specific Error X210 001 0 0001 0000 Reserved

Configuration Error

X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error; no additional information

X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid input data format selected (channel 0)

X402 010 0 0000 0010 Invalid input data format selected (channel 1)

X403 010 0 0000 0011 Invalid output data format selected (channel 0)

X404 010 0 0000 0100 Invalid output data format selected (channel 1)

(1) X represents “Don’t Care”.

Table 39 - Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF4 and 1762-OF4

Error Type

Hex Equivalent

(1)

Module Error

Code

Extended Error

Information Code

Error Description

Binary Binary

No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error

General Common

Hardware Error

X200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error; no additional information

X201 001 0 0000 0001 Power-up reset state

Hardware-specific Error X300 001 1 0000 0000 Reserved

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 139

Appendix C Troubleshoot Your System

Calling Rockwell

Automation for Assistance

If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for assistance, it is helpful to

obtain the following (prior to calling):

• Controller type, series letter, revision letter, and firmware (FRN) number of the

controller

• Controller indicator status

• Controller error codes (See MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set

Reference Manual, Publication 1763-RM001

for error code information.)

Configuration Error

X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error; no additional information

X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid range select (Channel 0)

X402 010 0 0000 0010 Invalid range select (Channel 1)

X403 010 0 0000 0011 Invalid range select (Channel 2)

X404 010 0 0000 0100 Invalid range select (Channel 3)

X405 010 0 0000 0101 Invalid filter select (Channel 0) – 1762-IF4 only

X406 010 0 0000 0110 Invalid filter select (Channel 1) – 1762-IF4 only

X407 010 0 0000 0111 Invalid filter select (Channel 2) – 1762-IF4 only

X408 010 0 0000 1000 Invalid filter select (Channel 3) – 1762-IF4 only

X409 010 0 0000 1001 Invalid format select (Channel 0)

X40A 010 0 0000 1010 Invalid format select (Channel 1)

X40B 010 0 0000 1011 Invalid format select (Channel 2)

X40C 010 0 0000 1100 Invalid format select (Channel 3)

(1) X represents “Don’t Care”.

Table 39 - Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF4 and 1762-OF4 (Continued)

Error Type

Hex Equivalent

(1)

Module Error

Code

Extended Error

Information Code

Error Description

Binary Binary

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix C Troubleshoot Your System

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 141

Appendix D

Use ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating

System

The operating system (OS) can be upgraded through the communication port on the controller.

To download a new operating system, you must have the ControlFLASH™ Upgrade Kit, which is

described in the ControlFLASH User Manual, publication 1756-UM105

The newer OS firmware for the controller is prepared in DMK disk image format which requires

ControlFLASH version 13.00 or later.

To download new OS firmware for a MicroLogix controller, go to the Rockwell Automation

Product Compatibility and Download Center (PCDC) at rok.auto/pcdc

Prepare for Firmware

Update

Before upgrading the controller’s operating system, you must:

• Install ControlFLASH software on your computer.

• Extract the DMK kit containing the latest firmware (for ControlFLASH version 13.00 or

later only).

• Prepare the controller for updating.

Install ControlFLASH Software

To install ControlFLASH properly, see the Install ControlFLASH section in ControlFLASH User

Manual, publication 1756-UM105.

If a ControlFLASH directory does not exist, one is created in your Program Files directory.

Use DMK Extraction Tool for Firmware Upgrade

This section applies only to the newer OS firmware prepared in DMK format which requires

ControlFLASH version 13.00 or later.

IMPORTANT Installing a new operating system deletes the user program on the

controller. After the operating system upgrade is successful, you must

transfer your control program back to the controller. The

communication parameters are described in Table 7

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix D Use ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System

1. Launch the DMK Extraction Tool application under Programs > Flash > Programming

Tools.

2. Select Browse and choose the location of the DMK file in the system.

3. Select OK.

4. Select one or more DMK files that you want to extract, then select Extract.

The DMK Extraction Progress dialog box appears.

5. After the extraction is complete, select OK to close the dialog box.

6. Select Cancel to close the DMK Extraction Tool.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 143

Appendix D Use ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System

Once the DMK files have been extracted from a folder, they are no longer shown when the DMK

Extraction Tool is used again to browse the same folder.

Prepare the Controller for Firmware Update

Connect the computer COM port to channel 0 on the MicroLogix 1100 using a 1761-CBL-PM02

cable.

Controller Configuration

The controller must be configured for default communications (use the Communications

Toggle functionality which is available on the LCD; DCOMM indicator on) and be in the Program

mode (use the Mode Switch which is available on the LCD.) to allow the download of a new

operating system.

See Use the Communications Toggle Functionality on page 52

for information about how to

use the Communications Toggle functionality.

See Use the Mode Switch on page 88

for information about controller modes and how to use

the Mode Switch.

Sequence of Operation The following steps detail the key events in the upgrade process.

1. Controller mode and communications parameters are checked. The screen as shown

below is displayed on the LCD as well.

2. Download begins.

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix D Use ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System

3. During the download, the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs perform a walking bit pattern. The

screen as shown below is displayed on the LCD as well.

4. When the download is complete, the integrity of the new OS is checked. If the new OS is

corrupt, the controller sends an error message to the download tool and flashes the

Missing or Corrupt OS LED pattern. See Missing or Corrupt OS LED Pattern on page 144

below.

5. Following a successful transfer, the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs flash on and remain on

for five seconds. Then the controller resets.

Missing or Corrupt OS LED

Pattern

When an operating system download is not successful or if the controller does not contain a

valid operating system, the controller flashes the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs on and off.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 145

Appendix E

Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485

Interface

The following protocols are supported from the RS-232/RS-485 communication channel

(Channel 0):

•DF1 Full-duplex

• DF1 Half-duplex master/slave

• DF1 Radio modem

•DH-485

• Modbus RTU master/slave

•ASCII

RS-232 Communication

Interface

The communications port on the MicroLogix 1100 controller utilizes a combined RS-232/RS-485

interface. RS-232 and RS-485 are Electronics Industries Association (EIA) standards that

specify the electrical and mechanical characteristics for serial binary communication. They

provide various system configuration possibilities. RS-232 and RS-485 define electrical

connection characteristics, not protocols.

One of the biggest benefits of an RS-232 interface is that it lets you integrate telephone and

radio modems into your control system (using the appropriate DF1 protocol only, not DH-485

protocol), but it is for point-to-point connections only between two devices.

RS-485 Communication

Interface

The RS-485 interface supports connection of up to 32 devices in a multidrop hard-wired

configuration using DH-485, DF1 Half-duplex

(a)

, or Modbus protocols. Also, the RS-485 interface

supports connection in a multidrop hard-wired configuration using ASCII protocols.

DF1 Full-duplex Protocol DF1 Full-duplex protocol provides a point-to-point connection between two devices. DF1 Full-

duplex protocol combines data transparency (American National Standards Institute ANSI -

X3.28-1976 specification subcategory D1) and 2-way simultaneous transmission with

embedded responses (subcategory F1).

MicroLogix 1100 controllers support the DF1 Full-duplex protocol via RS-232 connection to

external devices, such as computers, or other controllers that support DF1 Full-duplex.

DF1 is an open protocol. See the DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual, publication

1770-RM516

, for more information.

DF1 Full-duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point protocol) is useful where

RS-232 point-to-point communication is required. DF1 protocol controls message flow, detects

and signals errors, and retries if errors are detected.

Example DF1 Full-Duplex Connections

For information about required network connecting equipment, see Communication

Connections on page 51.

(a) OS series B FRN 4 or later.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

Figure 91 - Example of DF1 Full-duplex Connections

DF1 Half-duplex Protocol DF1 Half-duplex protocol is a multi-drop single master/multiple slave network. DF1 Half-duplex

protocol supports data transparency (American National Standards Institute ANSI - X3.28-1976

specification subcategory D1). In contrast to DF1 Full-duplex, communication takes place in

one direction at a time. You can use the RS-232/RS-485 port on the MicroLogix 1100 controller

as both a half-duplex programming port and a half-duplex peer-to-peer messaging port.

DF1 Half-duplex Operation

A DF1 Half-duplex master device initiates all communication by polling each slave device. The

slave device can only transmit when it is polled by the master. It is the master’s responsibility

to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to

communicate.

An additional feature of the DF1 Half-duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to

enable a MSG write or read to/from another slave. When the initiating slave is polled, the MSG

is sent to the master. The master recognizes that the message is not intended for it, but for

another slave, so the master immediately forwards the message to the intended slave. The

master does this automatically; you do not need to program the master to move data between

slave nodes. This slave-to-slave transfer can also be used by programming software to allow

slave-to-slave upload and download of programs to processors (including the master) on the

DF1 Half-duplex link.

A MicroLogix 1100 controller can act as the master or as a slave on a Half-duplex network.

When the MicroLogix 1100 controller is a slave device, a master device is required to run the

network. Several other Allen-Bradley products support the DF1 Half-duplex master protocol.

They include the SLC 5/03 and higher processors, enhanced PLC-5 processors,

MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix 1500 controllers, and RSLinx software (version 2.x or later).

DF1 Half-duplex supports up to 255 devices (address 0…254) with address 255 reserved for

master broadcasts. As a DF1 Half-duplex slave device, the MicroLogix 1100 controller supports

broadcast reception. As a DF1 Half-duplex master, the MicroLogix 1100 controller supports both

the reception and initiation of broadcast write commands (via the MSG instruction). The

MicroLogix 1100 controller also supports Half-duplex modems using RTS/CTS hardware

handshaking.

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

Computer

Modem cable

Modem

CH0

1761-CBL-PM02

MicroLogix 1100

Computer

MicroLogix 1100

CH0

1761-CBL-PM02

Null modem

adapter

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 147

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

Figure 92 - Example of DF1 Half-duplex Connections

Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi-drop

Link

When communication is between either your programming software and a MicroLogix

Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers via slave-

to-slave communication on a larger multi-drop link, the devices depend on a DF1 Half-duplex

master to give each of them access in a timely manner. As the number of slave devices

increase, the time between when slave devices are polled also increases. This increase in time

may also be large if you are using low communication rates. As these time periods grow,

consider increasing the poll timeout and reply timeout values for slave devices.

Use Modems with MicroLogix Programmable Controllers

The types of modems you can use with MicroLogix controllers include the following:

• Dial-up phone modems

A MicroLogix controller, on the receiving end of the dial-up connection, can be

configured for DF1 Full-duplex protocol with or without handshaking. The modem

connected to the MicroLogix controller should support auto-answer. The MicroLogix

1100 controller supports ASCII out communications. Therefore, it can cause a modem to

initiate or disconnect a phone call.

• Leased-line modems

Leased-line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that are typically leased from

the local phone company. The dedicated lines can be in a point-to-point topology to

support full-duplex communications between two modems or in a multi-drop topology

to support half-duplex communications between three or more modems.

• Radio modems

Radio modems can be implemented in a point-to-point topology to support either half-

duplex or full-duplex communications, or in a multi-drop topology to support half-

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

RSLinx software version 2.0 or later,

SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05,

PLC-5, MicroLogix 1100, MicroLogix

1200, and MicroLogix 1500 controllers

configured for DF1 Half-duplex master.

RS-232

(DF1 Half-duplex Protocol)

MicroLogix

1500 (Slave)

SLC 5/04

(Slave)

MicroLogix

1000 (Slave)

SLC 5/03 with 1747-KE

interface module (Slave)

MicroLogix

1200 (Slave)

Modem

MicroLogix

1100 (Slave)

IMPORTANT If a program download is started when using DF1 Half-duplex, but then

is interrupted due to electromagnetic interference or other events,

discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership

timeout period and then restart the program download. The ownership

timeout period is 60 seconds. After the timeout, you can re-establish

communications with the processor and try the program download

again. The only other way to remove program ownership is to cycle

power on the processor.

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

duplex communications between three or more modems. MicroLogix 1100 controllers

also support the DF1 Radio Modem protocol.

• Line drivers

Line drivers, also called short-haul modems, do not actually modulate the serial data,

but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over long transmission

distances (up to several miles). Line drivers are available in full-duplex and half-duplex

models. Allen-Bradley’s AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter is a half-duplex line driver

that converts an RS-232 electrical signal into an RS-485 electrical signal, increasing the

signal transmission distance from 15…1219 m (50…4000 ft.), 2438 m (8000 ft.) when

bridged.

For point-to-point full-duplex modem connections that do not require any modem

handshaking signals to operate, use DF1 Full-duplex protocol with no handshaking. For point-

to-point Full-duplex modem connections that require RTS/CTS handshaking, use DF1 Full-

duplex protocol with handshaking.

For radio modem connections, use DF1 Radio Modem protocol, especially if store and forward

capability is required.

For general multi-drop modem connections, or for point-to-point modem connections that

require RTS/CTS handshaking, use DF1 Half-duplex slave protocol. In this case, one (and only

one) of the other devices must be configured for DF1 Half-duplex master protocol.

DH-485 Communication

Protocol

The DH-485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a

single pair of wires. DH-485 protocol uses RS-485 Half-duplex as its physical interface. RS-485

is a definition of electrical connection characteristics; it is not a protocol. RS-485 uses devices

that can coexist on a common data circuit, thus allowing data to be easily shared between

devices.

The DH-485 network offers:

• Interconnection of 32 devices

• Multi-master (peer-to-peer) capability

• Token passing access control

• The ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network

• Maximum network segment of 1219 m (4000 ft.)

The DH-485 protocol supports two classes of devices: initiators and responders. All initiators

on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers. To determine which initiator has

the right to transmit, a token passing algorithm is used.

Control of message transfers on the DH-485 network is performed by rotating the token along

the nodes on the network. A node holding the token can send a message onto the network.

Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions (based on the Token Hold Factor) each

time it receives the token. After a node sends a message, it passes the token to the next

device.

The allowable range of node addresses is 1…31. There must be at least one initiator on the

network (such as a MicroLogix controller, or an SLC 5/02 or later processor).

IMPORTANT Never attempt to use DH-485 protocol through modems under any

circumstance.

All MicroLogix controllers support RTS/CTS modem handshaking when configured

for DF1 Full-duplex protocol with the control line parameter set to Full-duplex

Modem Handshaking or DF1 Half-duplex slave protocol with the control line

parameter set to “Half-Duplex Modem”. No other modem handshaking lines (for

instance, Data Set Ready and Data Terminal Ready) are supported by MicroLogix

1100 controller. MicroLogix 1100 controller also does not support DCD (Data Carrier

Detect).

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 149

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

DH-485 Configuration Parameters

When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH-485, the following parameters can be

changed:

See Software Considerations on page 150

for tips on setting the parameters listed above.

Devices that use the DH-485 Network

In addition to the MicroLogix controllers, the devices that are shown in Table 41 also support

the DH-485 network.

Important DH-485 Network Planning Considerations

Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware. Some of the factors

that can affect system performance are:

• Amount of electrical noise, temperature, and humidity in the network environment

• Number of devices on the network

• Connection and grounding quality in installation

• Amount of communication traffic on the network

• Type of process being controlled

• Network configuration

The major hardware and software issues you must resolve before installing a network are

discussed in the following sections.

Hardware Considerations

You must decide the length of the communication cable, where you route it, and how to

protect it from the environment where it will be installed.

Table 40 - DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters

Parameter Options

Communication Rate 9600, 19.2K

Node Address 1…31 decimal

Token Hold Factor 1…4

Table 41 - Devices that Support a DH-485 Network

Catalog Number Description Installation Function Publication

Bulletin 1762 MicroLogix 1200 Series A or later These controllers support DH-485 communications. 1762-UM001

Bulletin 1764 MicroLogix 1500 Series A or later These controllers support DH-485 communications. 1764-UM001

Bulletin 1766 MicroLogix 1400 Series A or later These controllers support DH-485 communications. 1766-UM001

Bulletin 1747 Processors SLC 500 Processors SLC Chassis These processors support a variety of I/O requirements and functionality. 1747-UM011

1746-BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis

Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign devices. Program in

BASIC to interface the 3 channels (2 RS232 and 1 DH-485) to printers,

modems, or the DH-485 network for data collection.

1746-UM004

1746-PM001

1746-RM001

1784-KTX, 1784-KTXD PC DH-485 IM PCI Computer Bus Provides DH-485 using RSLinx software 1784-UM527

1784-PCMK PCMCIA IM

PCMCIA slot in

computer

Provides DH-485 using RSLinx software 1784-UM519

2711-K5A2, 2711-B5A2,

2711-K5A5, 2711-B5A5,

2711-K5A1, 2711-B5A1,

2711-K9A2, 2711-T9A2,

2711-K9A5, 2711-T9A5,

2711-K9A1, 2711-T9A1

PanelView 550 and

PanelView 900 Operator

Terminals

Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors 2711-UM014

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

When the communication cable is installed, you must know how many devices are to be

connected during installation and how many devices can be added in the future. The following

sections help you understand and plan the network.

Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable

The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m (4000 ft.). This is the total cable

distance from the first node to the last node in a segment. However, two segments can be

used to extend the DH-485 network to 2438 m (8000 ft.). For additional information on

connections using the AIC+, see the AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter User Manual,

publication 1761-UM004

Planning Cable Routes

Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference:

• Keep the communication cable at least 1.52 m (5 ft.) from any electric motors,

transformers, rectifiers, generators, arc welders, induction furnaces, or sources of

microwave radiation.

• If you must run the cable across power feed lines, run the cable at right angles to the

lines.

• If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit, keep the

communication cable at least 0.15 m (6 in.) from AC power lines of less than 20 A, 0.30 m

(1 ft.) from lines greater than 20 A, but only up to 100 kVA, and 0.60 m (2 ft.) from lines of

100 kVA or more.

• If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit, keep the

communication cable at least 0.08 m (3 in.) from AC power lines of less than 20 A, 0.15 m

(6 in.) from lines greater than 20 A, but only up to 100 kVA, and 0.30 m (1 ft.) from lines of

100 kVA or more.

Run the communication cable through a conduit to provide extra protection from

physical damage and electrical interference. If you route the cable through a conduit,

follow these additional recommendations:

- Use ferromagnetic conduits near critical sources of electrical interference. You can

use aluminum conduits in non-critical areas.

- Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit.

Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector (use pipe clamps and the

heavy gauge wire or wire braid) to hold both sections at the same potential.

- Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground.

- Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable.

- Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit. The conduit should contain only serial

communication cables.

- Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental

specifications.

For more information on planning cable routes, see Industrial Automation Wiring and

Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1

Software Considerations

Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can

be set to the specific requirements of the network. The following are major configuration

factors that have a significant effect on network performance:

• Number of nodes on the network

• Addresses of those nodes

• Communication rate

The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select

parameters for optimum network performance (speed). See your programming software’s user

manual for more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 151

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

Number of Nodes

The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes.

Unnecessary nodes (such as a second programming terminal that is not being used) slow the

data transfer rate. The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32.

Setting Node Addresses

The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order.

Assign initiators, such as computers, the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time

that is required to initialize the network. The valid range for the MicroLogix controllers is 1…31

(controllers cannot be node 0). The default setting is 1. The node address is stored in the

controller Communications Status file (CS0:5/0 to CS0:5/7).

Setting Controller Communication Rate

The best network performance occurs at the highest communication rate, which is 19,200.

19,200 is the default communication rate for a MicroLogix device on the DH-485 network. All

devices must be at the same communication rate. This rate is stored in the controller

Communications Status file (CS0:5/8 to CS0:5/15).

Setting Maximum Node Address

Once you have an established network set up and are confident that you are not adding more

devices, you can enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your

controllers. Set it to the highest node address being used.

MicroLogix Remote Packet Support

MicroLogix controllers can respond and initiate with communications (or commands) that do

not originate on the local DH-485 network. This is useful in installations where communication

is needed between DH-485 and DH+™ networks.

The example below shows how to send messages from a device on the DH+ network to a

MicroLogix controller on the DH-485 network. This method uses an SLC 5/04 processor as the

bridge connection.

When using this method (as shown in the illustration below):

• PLC-5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers.

• MicroLogix controllers can respond to MSG instructions received.

• MicroLogix controllers can initiate MSG instructions to devices on the DH+ network.

• The computer can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers.

• The computer can do remote programming of MicroLogix controllers.

IMPORTANT Set all devices to the same maximum node address.

Use a 1763-NC01 series A or later cable to connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a

DH-485 network.

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your DH-485 network directly

without using a RS-232 to RS-485 converter and optical isolator, such as the AIC+

Advanced Interface Converter, 1761-NET-AIC, as shown in Figure 94

, because

Channel 0 has isolation and RS-485 built-in.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

Figure 93 - Communication Between DH-485 and DH+ Networks with MicroLogix Controllers

Example DH-485 Connections

The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix controllers to

the DH-485 network. You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your DH-485 network

directly without using a RS-232 to RS-485 converter and optical isolator, such as the AIC+

Advanced Interface Converter, 1761-NET-AIC, as shown in Figure 94

, because Channel 0 has

isolation and RS-485 built-in.

However, you can use an AIC+ to connect other controllers to a DH-485 network.

A-B

PanelView

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

AIC+ AIC+ AIC+

AIC+

DH-485 Network

SLC 5/04 processor

PanelView 550 terminal

MicroLogix 1500

controller

MicroLogix 1000

controller

MicroLogix 1200

controller

SLC 5/04 processor

AIC+

SLC 5/04 processor PLC-5 processor

DH+ Network

Computer

MicroLogix 1100

controller

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 153

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

Figure 94 - DH-485 Network with a MicroLogix 1100 Controller

Figure 95 - Typical 3-Node Network

A-B

PanelView

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

ESC OK

(2)

AIC+

(1)

(3)

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

ESC OK

AIC+

DH-485 Network

SLC 5/04 processor

PanelView 550 terminal

MicroLogix 1500

controller

MicroLogix 1000

controller

MicroLogix 1200

controller

Computer

AIC+

MicroLogix 1100

controller

DH-485 Network

1763-NC01

(4)

Belden shielded twisted-pair cable

1761-CBL-AP00

or 1761-CBL-PM02

1747-CP3 or

1761-CBL-AC00

Port 1 or port 2

to computer

24V DC (user

supplied)

(1) DB-9 RS-232 port

(2) mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port

(3) RS-485 port

(4) Series A or later cables are required.

A-B

PanelView

TERM

COM

SHLD

CHS GND

TX PWR

DC SOURCE

CABLE

EXTERNAL

PanelView 550

terminal

MicroLogix 1100

controller

1761-CBL-AM00

or 1761-CBL-HM02

1747-CP3 or 1761-CBL-AC00

RJ45 port

1761-CBL-AS09

or 1761-CBL-AS03

AIC+

This 3-node network is not expandable.

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix E Connect to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface

Modbus Communication

Protocol

Modbus is a Half-Duplex, master-slave communications protocol. The Modbus network master

reads and writes coils and registers. Modbus protocol allows a single master to communicate

with a maximum of 247 slave devices. MicroLogix 1100 controllers support Modbus RTU saster

and Modbus RTU slave protocol.

For more information on how to configure your MicroLogix 1100 controller for Modbus protocol,

see the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,

publication 1763-RM001

. For more information about the Modbus protocol, see the Modbus

Protocol Specifications (available from www.modbus.org).

ASCII ASCII provides connection to other ASCII devices, such as barcode readers, weigh scales, serial

printers, and other intelligent devices.

You can use ASCII by configuring the RS-232/RS-485 port, channel 0 for the ASCII driver. For

detailed configuration information, see the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers

Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 155

Appendix F

Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

MicroLogix 1100 Controllers

and Ethernet

Communication

Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices at

10…100 Mbps. The physical communication media options for the MicroLogix 1100 controllers

are:

•Built-in

- Twisted-pair (10/100Base-T)

• With media converters or hubs

-Fiber optic

-Broadband

- Thick-wire coaxial cable (10Base-5)

- Thin-wire coaxial cable (10Base-2)

The MicroLogix 1100 controller supports Ethernet communication via the Ethernet

communication channel 1 shown.

MicroLogix 1100

Performance

Considerations

Actual performance of an MicroLogix 1100 controller varies according to:

• Size of Ethernet messages

• Frequency of Ethernet messages

•Network loading

• Implementation of and performance of your processor application program

Channel 1

Ethernet

(10/100Base-T)

Channel 0

RS-232/485

(DH485, DF1, or ASCII)

Side view

Table 42 - Optimal Performance: RSLinx Software to MicroLogix 1100 Series A OS FRN 3 Controller

(2-node Ethernet network)

Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second

Single Typed Read 1 20 20

Single Typed Reads 20 20 400

Single Typed Reads 100 20 2000

Table 43 - Optimal Performance: MicroLogix 1100 FRN 3 to MicroLogix 1100 Series A OS FRN 3

Controller (2-node Ethernet network)

Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second

Single Typed Read 1 11 11

Single Typed Reads 20 11 220

Single Typed Reads 100 11 1,100

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

MicroLogix 1100 and

Computer Connections to

the Ethernet Network

The MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO/IEC 8802-3 STD 802.3 and utilizes

10/100Base-T media. Connections are made directly from the MicroLogix 1100 controller to an

Ethernet hub or switch. The network setup is simple and cost effective. Typical network

topology is shown in Figure 96

Figure 96 - Ethernet Network Topology

Connect an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network

The MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port supports the following Ethernet settings:

• 10 Mbps half-duplex or full-duplex

• 100 Mbps half-duplex or full-duplex

Mode selection can be automatic, based on the IEEE 802.3 auto negotiation protocol. In most

cases, using the auto negotiation function results in proper operation between a switch port

and MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port.

With RSLogix500 programming software version 7.00.00 or later, you can manually set the

communication rate and duplex mode of an Ethernet port you have connected to the switch

port. The settings of the Ethernet port and the switch port must match.

Table 44 - Optimal Performance: RSLinx Software to MicroLogix 1100 Series B OS FRN 4 Controller

Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second

Single Typed Read 1 50 50

Single Typed Reads 20 50 2,500

Single Typed Reads 100 50 5,000

Table 45 - Optimal Performance: MicroLogix 1100 Series A OS FRN 3 to MicroLogix 1100 Series B OS

FRN 4 Controller

Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second

Single Typed Read 1 18 18

Single Typed Reads 20 18 360

Single Typed Reads 100 18 1,800

Table 46 - Optimal Performance: MicroLogix 1100 Series B OS FRN 4 to MicroLogix 1100 Series B OS

FRN 4 Controller

Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second

Single Typed Read 120 20

Single Typed Reads 20 20 400

Single Typed Reads 100 20 2,000

IMPORTANT The MicroLogix 1100 controller contains a 10/100Base-T RJ45 Ethernet

connector, which connects to standard Ethernet hubs or switches via

8-wire twisted-pair straight-through cable. To access other Ethernet

mediums, use 10/100Base-T media converters or Ethernet hubs or

switches that can be connected together via fiber, thin-wire, or thick-

wire coaxial cables, or any other physical media commercially available

with Ethernet hubs or switches.

To computer Ethernet card To MicroLogix 1100 controller Channel 1

RJ45 connectors on both ends of

cable (10/100Base-T)

Ethernet hub

or switch

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 157

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

Cables

Shielded and non-shielded twisted-pair 10/100Base-T cables with RJ45 connectors are

supported. The maximum cable length between a MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port and a

10/100Base-T port on an Ethernet hub or switch (without repeaters or fiber) is 100 m (323 ft.).

However, in an industrial application, keep the cable length to a minimum.

The standard Ethernet cable is terminated in accordance with EIA/TIA 568B on both ends. The

crossover cable is terminated to EIA/TIA 568B at one end and EIA/TIA 568A at the other, exactly

as shown in Figure 97

Figure 97

and Figure 98 show how the TIA/EIA 568A and 568B are to be terminated. There are

four pairs of wires contained in a CAT5 UTP cable. These pairs of cables are color-coded white

blue/blue, white orange/orange, white green/green, and white brown/brown. They are also

numbered one to four in the order shown.

Figure 97 - EIA/TIA 568A and 568B Ethernet Cable

IMPORTANT When connecting the MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port to a 10/100Base-T

Ethernet switch, note the following recommendations:

• Use the auto negotiation function for both the switch port and the

MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port.

• If you want to force to a specific speed/duplex mode, you should force

the MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port and leave the switch in auto

negotiation mode to match speed/duplex settings of the MicroLogix 1100

Ethernet port.

• If you want to disable the auto negotiation function for both ports, then

you should only force both the switch and the MicroLogix 1100 port to

either 100 Mbps half-duplex or 10 Mbps half-duplex.

If you attempt to force both the switch and the MicroLogix1100 port to

either 100 Mbps full-duplex or 10 Mbps full-duplex, the Ethernet link does

not establish and Ethernet communications does not work.

The Ethernet cabling with straight-through method is recommended as shown in

Table 47. Do not make the incorrect connection.

Table 47 - Straight-through Cabling

Pin Pin Name Cable Color

1 Tx+ Orange/white

2 Tx- Orange

3 Rx+ Green/white

4 Not used by 10/100Base-T Blue

5 Not used by 10/100Base-T Blue/white

6 Rx- Green

7 Not used by 10/100Base-T Brown/white

8 Not used by 10/100Base-T Brown

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

Figure 98 - EIA/TIA 568A and 568B Cable Termination

Ethernet Connections TCP/IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages. On top of TCP, EtherNet/IP

protocol is required to establish sessions and to send the MSG commands. You can initiate

connections by either a client program (RSLinx software) or a processor.

The client program or processor must first establish a connection to the MicroLogix 1100

controller to enable the controller to receive solicited messages from a client program or

another processor.

To send an outgoing message, the MicroLogix 1100 controller must first establish a connection

with the destination node at a specified IP address on the Ethernet network. A connection is

established when a MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists.

When a MSG instruction executes, the MicroLogix 1100 controller checks to see whether a

connection has been established with the destination node. If a connection has not been

established, the MicroLogix 1100 controller attempts to establish a connection of the peer type.

To receive messages from another device on Ethernet, an incoming connection must be

established. This incoming connection is made by the sending processor and uses one

incoming connection in the receiving processor.

The MicroLogix 1100 controller supports a maximum of 32 connections, allowing a maximum of

16 outgoing and a maximum of 16 incoming simultaneous connections with up to 32 other

devices or applications. The connections are dedicated as follows:

The most common wiring for RJ45 cables is the straight-through cable that means

that pin 1 of the plug on one end is connected to pin 1 of the plug on the other end.

The straight-through RJ45 cable is commonly used to connect network cards with

hubs on 10Base-T and 100Base-Tx networks. On network cards, pair 1…2 is the

transmitter, and pair 3…6 is the receiver. The other two pairs are not used. On

hubs pair 1…2 is the receiver and 3…6 the transmitter. Wire your cables with the

same color sequence. In this cable layout, all pins are wired one-to-one to the

other side. The pins on the RJ45 connector are assigned in pairs, and every pair

carries one differential signal. Each line pair has to be twisted.

In small network where only two Ethernet devices must be connected together, a

crossover RJ45 cable is necessary, where the transmit and receive lines on both

RJ45 connectors are cross connected. The color coding for the crossover RJ45

cable have been defined in the EIA/TIA 568A standard. In a crossover cable layout,

remember that one end is normal, and the other end has the crossover

configuration.

Number of Connections

(1)

(1) Connections established by an INTERCHANGE™ client, RSLinx client, and peers are all included when counting the number of

connections.

Dedicated to

16 Outgoing connections

16 Incoming connections

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 159

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

Duplicate IP address

Detection

The MicroLogix 1100 controller series B firmware supports duplicate IP address detection.

When you change the IP address or connect one of the MicroLogix controllers to an

EtherNet/IP network, the MicroLogix 1100 controller checks to make sure that the IP address

that is assigned to this device does not match the address of any other network device. The

MicroLogix 1100 controller checks every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network. If

the MicroLogix 1100 controller determines that there is a conflict (another device on the

network with a matching IP address), the following message is posted on the LCD display.

To correct this conflict, use the instructions in this chapter to change the IP address of the

EtherNet/IP device. Then cycle power to the device or reset the device (such as disconnecting

the Ethernet cable and reconnecting the cable).

There is also the possibility that two EtherNet/IP devices can detect a conflict simultaneously.

If this occurs, remove the device with the incorrect IP address or correct its conflict. To get

the second device out of conflict mode, cycle power to the module or disconnect its Ethernet

cable and reconnect the cable. The MicroLogix 1100 controller checks every 2 minutes for a

duplicate IP address on the network.

Configure the Ethernet

Channel on the MicroLogix

1100 Controller

There are two ways to configure the MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet channel 1.

• With a BOOTP or DHCP request at controller power-up

• Manually setting the configuration parameters using RSLogix 500 programming

software

The configuration parameters are shown in Table 48

IMPORTANT For outgoing connections, no more that one connection per destination

node is established. If multiple MSG instructions use the same

destination node, they share the same connection.

Table 48 - Ethernet Configuration Parameters

Parameter Description Default Status

Hardware Address The MicroLogix 1100 controller Ethernet hardware address

Ethernet hardware

address

Read-only

IP Address

The MicroLogix 1100 controller Internet address (in network byte order). The Internet address must be

specified to connect to the TCP/IP network.

0 (undefined) Read/write

Subnet Mask

The MicroLogix 1100 controller subnet mask (in network byte order). The subnet mask is used to interpret IP

addresses when the Internet is divided into subnets. A subnet mask of all zeros indicates that no subnet

mask has been configured.

0 (undefined) Read/write

Gateway Address

The address of a gateway (in network byte order) that provides connection to another IP network. A gateway

address of all zeros indicates that no gateway has been configured.

0 (undefined) Read/write

Default Domain Name

The default domain name can have the following formats:

’a.b.c’, ’a.b’ or ’a’, where a, b, c must start with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and have as interior

characters only letters, digits, or hyphens. The maximum length is 63 characters.

NULL

(undefined)

Read/write

Primary Name Server

The IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Primary Domain Name System (DNS)

server

0 (undefined) Read/write

Secondary Name

Server

The IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Secondary Domain Name System (DNS)

server.

0 (undefined) Read/write

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

Configure Using RSLogix

500 Programming Software

See the online documentation provided with your programming software.

Configure Using BOOTP Bootstrap protocol (BOOTP) is a low-level protocol that TCP/IP nodes use to obtain startup

information. By default, the MicroLogix 1100 controller broadcasts BOOTP requests at power-

up. The BOOTP Valid parameter remains clear until a BOOTP reply has been received. BOOTP

lets you dynamically assign IP addresses to processors on the Ethernet Link.

To use BOOTP, a BOOTP server must exist on the local Ethernet subnet. The server is a

computer that has BOOTP server software installed and reads a text file containing network

information for individual nodes on the network.

The host system’s BOOTP configuration file must be updated to service requests from

MicroLogix 1100 controllers. The parameters in Table 49

must be configured.

When BOOTP is enabled, the following events occur at power-up:

• The processor broadcasts a BOOTP-request message containing its hardware address

over the local network or subnet.

• The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the addresses in its look-up

table.

• The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with the IP address and other

network information that corresponds to the hardware address it received.

BOOTP Enable

The BOOTP enable switch. When BOOTP is enabled, the MicroLogix 1100 controller attempts to learn its

network related parameters at power-up via a BOOTP request. There must be a BOOTP server on the network

capable of responding to this BOOTP request. When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled, the MicroLogix 1100

controller uses the locally configured network-related parameters (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast

address, and so on).

1 (enabled) Read/write

DHCP Enable

The DHCP auto configuration enable switch. When DHCP is enabled, a DHCP server automatically assigns

network-related parameters to the MicroLogix 1100 controller when it signs in a TCP/IP network. There must

be a DHCP server on the network capable of allocating network addresses and configuring parameters to

newly attached device. When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled, the MicroLogix 1100 controller uses the

locally configured network-related parameters (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, and so on).

0 (disabled) Read/write

SNMP Server Enable

The SNMP enable switch. Select to enable SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). Not applicable to the

MicroLogix 1100 controller.

0 (disabled) Read/write

SMTP Client Enable

(Series B only)

The SMTP Client service enable switch. When SMTP is enabled, the MicroLogix 1100 controller is capable of

transmitting email messages that are generated by a 485CIF write message with a string element. There

must be an SMTP process email service. This provides a versatile mechanism to report alarms, status, and

other data-related functions.

0 (disabled) Read/write

Auto Negotiate and

Port Setting

When Auto Negotiate is disabled (unchecked), the Ethernet speed/duplex is forced to either 10 Mbps/Half-

duplex, 10 Mbps/Full-duplex, 100 Mbps/Half-duplex, or 100 Mbps/Full-duplex, as selected in the Port Setting

field.

When Auto Negotiate is enabled (checked), the Port Setting field allows you to select the range of

speed/duplex settings that the MicroLogix 1100 controller negotiates.

Auto Negotiate

enabled and Port

Setting. 10/100

Mbps Full-duplex/

Half-duplex

Read/write

MSG Connection

Timeout

The amount of time (in ms) allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with the destination node.

The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250…65,500.

15,000 ms Read/write

MSG Reply Timeout

The amount of time (in ms) that the MicroLogix 1100 controller will wait for a reply to a command that it has

initiated via a MSG instruction. The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250…65,500.

3,000 ms Read/write

Inactivity Timeout

(Series B only)

The amount of time (in minutes) that a MSG connection could remain inactive before it is ended. The

Inactivity Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1…65,500 minutes.

30 minutes Read/write

Table 48 - Ethernet Configuration Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Default Status

Table 49 - Configuration Parameters

Parameter Description

IP Address A unique IP Address for the MicroLogix 1100 controller

Subnet Mask

Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting RFC 950, Internet

Standard Subnetting Procedure

Gateway

Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the MicroLogix 1100 controller

that provides connections to another IP network

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 161

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

With all hardware and IP addresses in one location, you can easily change IP addresses in the

BOOTP configuration file if your network must be changed.

The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the BOOTP Enable parameter in the channel

configuration file. When both BOOTP Enable and DHCP are cleared (disabled), the MicroLogix

1100 controller uses the existing channel configuration data.

Using the Rockwell Automation BOOTP/DHCP Utility

The Rockwell Automation BOOTP/DHCP server utility is a standalone program that incorporates

the functionality of standard BOOTP software with a user-friendly graphical interface. It is

located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 500 installation CD.

The newest version of the utility can be downloaded from the Product Compatibility and

Download Center (PCDC) at rok.auto/pcdc

. The device must have BOOTP enabled (factory

default) or DHCP enabled to use the utility.

To configure your device using the BOOTP utility, perform the following steps.

1. Run the BOOTP/DHCP server utility software. It asks you to configure your network

settings before using the BOOTP/DHCP server tool. Enter your Ethernet settings for

Subnet Mask and Gateway. If you are not sure about it, get help from your system

administrator. Just leave Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, and Domain Name. If the

corresponding information is allocated to the computer where the BOOTP/DHCP server

utility is installed, enter the same information.)

2. In the Request History panel, you see the hardware addresses of devices that issue

BOOTP or DHCP requests.

IMPORTANT If BOOTP is disabled, or no BOOTP server exists on the network, you

must use RSLogix 500 programming software to enter/change the IP

address for each processor or you must use DHCP instead of it.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

3. Double-click the hardware address of the device that you want to configure. You see

the New Entry pop-up window with the device's Ethernet Address (MAC).

4. Enter the IP Address and Description that you want to assign to the device, and select

OK. Leave Hostname blank.

The device is added to the Relation List, and displays the Ethernet Address (MAC) and

corresponding IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway (if applicable).

Use a DHCP Server To

Configure Your Processor

A DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations signing onto a TCP/IP

network. DHCP is based on BOOTP and maintains some backward compatibility. The main

difference is that BOOTP was designed for manual configuration, while DHCP allows for

dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to newly attached devices.

Subnet Masks and

Gateways

Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet Channel 1 configuration screen.

If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or routers, you must indicate

the following information when configuring Channel 1:

• Subnet mask

• Gateway address

A subnet mask is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to determine if an address is on

the local subnet or on another subnet. If an address is located on another subnetwork,

messages are routed through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination subnetwork.

If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet mask field at the default.

ATTENTION: The processor must be assigned a fixed network address. The IP

address of the processor must not be dynamically provided. Failure to

observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of

process control.

IMPORTANT If BOOTP is enabled, you can’t change any of the advanced Ethernet

communications characteristics.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 163

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets

If you manually configure Channel 1 for a MicroLogix 1100 controller on a subnet, clear the

checkbox for both of the “BOOTP Enable” and “DHCP Enable” options, as shown in Figure 99

Figure 99 - Channel Configuration Example

See Table 50 to configure the subnet mask and gateway address fields for each controller via

your programming software.

MicroLogix 1100 Embedded

Web Server Capability

MicroLogix 1100 controllers include not only the embedded web server that allows viewing of

module information, TCP/IP configuration, and diagnostic information, but the capabilities

that also allow viewing of the data file via Ethernet using a standard web browser.

For more information on MicroLogix 1100 embedded web server capability, see the

MicroLogix 1100 Embedded Web Server User Manual, publication 1763-UM002

If you Then

Manually configure Channel 1 and have a

network with subnets

• Verify that the BOOTP enable field is disabled

• Use your programming software to enter the subnet mask and

gateway address.

Use BOOTP to configure Channel 1 and have

a network with subnets

• Verify that BOOTP is enabled

• Include the subnet masks and gateway addresses

Table 50 - Subnet Mask and Gateway Address Fields

This field Specifies Configure by Doing the Following

Subnet Mask

The controller’s subnet mask.

The subnet mask is used to interpret IP addresses

when the Internet is divided into subnets.

Enter an address of the following form:

a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0...255 (decimal)

If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet mask field at the default.

If you change the default and must reset it, type 0.0.0.0.

Gateway Address

The IP address of the gateway that provides a

connection to another IP network.

This field is required when you communicate with

other devices not on a local subnet.

Enter an address of the following form:

a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0...255 (decimal)

The default address is No Gateway.

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix F Connect to Networks via Ethernet Interface

Notes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 165

Appendix G

System Loading and Heat Dissipation

System Loading

Calculations

The MicroLogix 1100 controller is designed to support up to any four 1762 expansion I/O

modules.

When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion I/O, an electrical load is placed on

the controller power supply. This section shows how to calculate the load of your control

system.

The following example is provided to illustrate system loading calculation. The system

calculation procedure accounts for the amount of 5V DC and 24V DC current that is consumed

by the controller, expansion I/O, and user-supplied equipment. Use the System Loading

Worksheet on page 166 to calculate your controller configuration.

System Loading Example Calculations

Current Loading

A maximum of four 1762 expansion I/O modules, in any combination, can be

connected to a MicroLogix 1100 controller. You can use this appendix to determine

the power supply load and heat dissipation for your system.

Table 51 - Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O

Catalog Number

(1)

n A B n x A n x B

Number of Modules

Device Current Requirements (max) Calculated Current

@ 5V DC (mA) @ 24V DC (mA) @ 5V DC (mA) @ 24V DC (mA)

1762-IA8 2 50 0 100 0

1762-IF4 40 50

1762-IF2OF2 40 105

1762-IQ8 50 0

1762-IQ16

(2)

1762-IQ32T 170 0

1762-IR4 40 50

1762-IT4 40 50

1762-OA8 115 0

1762-OB8 115 0

1762-OB16 175 0

1762-OB32T 175 0

1762-OF4 40 165

1762-OV32T 175 0

1762-OW8 2 80 90 160 180

1762-OW16

140

(2)

180

(2)

1762-OX6I 110 110

1762-IQ8OW6 110 80

Total Modules (4 maximum): 4 Subtotal: 260 180

(1) See your expansion I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table.

(2) Only applicable for series B and series C I/O modules.

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix G System Loading and Heat Dissipation

Validate the System

The example systems shown in Table 52 and Table 53 are verified to be acceptable

configurations. The systems are valid because:

• Calculated Current Values < Maximum Allowable Current Values

• Calculated System Loading < Maximum Allowable System Loading

System Loading Worksheet Table 54, Table 55, and Table 56 are provided for system loading validation. See System

Loading Example Calculations on page 165.

Current Loading

Table 52 - Validating Systems using 1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BBB, or 1763-L16DWD

Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values

Current Current (Subtotal from Table 51

)

800 mA @ 5V DC 700 mA @ 24V DC 0 mA + 260 mA = 260 mA @ 5V DC 120 mA + 180 mA = 300 mA @ 24V DC

System Loading System Loading

20.8 W

= (260 mA x 5V) + (300 mA x 24V)

= (1,300 mW) + (7,200 mW)

= 8,500 mW

= 8.50 W

Table 53 - Validating Systems using 1763-L16BWA

Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values

Current for Devices Connected to the +24V DC Sensor Supply Sum of all sensor currents

200 mA @ 24V DC 140 mA @ 24V DC (example sensor value)

Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion I/O Current Values (Subtotal from Table 51

)

800 mA @ 5V DC 700 mA @ 24V DC 0 mA + 260 mA = 260 mA @ 5V DC 120 mA + 180 mA = 300 mA @ 24V DC

System Loading System Loading

16.4 W

= (140 mA x 24V) + (260 mA x 5V) + (300 mA x 24V)

= (3,360 mW) + (1,300 mW) + (7,200 mW)

= 11,860 mW

= 11.9 W

Table 54 - Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O

Catalog Number

(1)

n A B n x A n x B

Number of Modules

Device Current Requirements Calculated Current

@ 5V DC (mA) @ 24V DC (mA) @ 5V DC (mA) @ 24V DC (mA)

1762-IA8 50 0

1762-IF4 40 50

1762-IF2OF2 40 105

1762-IQ8 50 0

1762-IQ16

(2)

1762-IQ32T 170 0

1762-IR4 40 50

1762-IT4 40 50

1762-OA8 115 0

1762-OB8 115 0

1762-OB16 175 0

1762-OB32T 175 0

1762-OF4 40 165

1762-OV32T 175 0

1762-OW8 80 90

1762-OW16

140

(2)

180

(2)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 167

Appendix G System Loading and Heat Dissipation

Calculating Heat Dissipation Use Table 57 when you must determine the heat dissipation of your system for installation in

an enclosure. For System Loading, take the value from the appropriate System Loading

Worksheet on page 166.

1762-OX6I 110 110

1762-IQ8OW6 110 80

Total Modules (4 maximum): Subtotal:

(1) See your expansion I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table.

(2) Only applicable for series B and series C I/O modules.

Table 54 - Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O (Continued)

Catalog Number

(1)

n A B n x A n x B

Number of Modules

Device Current Requirements Calculated Current

@ 5V DC (mA) @ 24V DC (mA) @ 5V DC (mA) @ 24V DC (mA)

Table 55 - Validating Systems using 1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BBB, or 1763-L16DWD

Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values

Current Current (Subtotal from Table 54)

800 mA @ 5V DC 700 mA @ 24V DC mA @ 5V DC mA @ 24V DC

System Loading System Loading

20.8 W

= (________ mA x 5V) + (________ mA x 24V)

= __________ mW + __________ mW

= __________ mW

= __________ W

Table 56 - Validating Systems using 1763-L16BWA

Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values

Current for Devices Connected to the +24V DC Sensor Supply Sum of all sensor currents

200 mA @ 24V DC mA @ 24V DC

Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion I/O Current (Subtotal from Table 54

)

800 mA @ 5V DC 700 mA @ 24V DC mA @ 5 V DC mA @ 24V DC

System Loading System Loading

16.4 W

= (________ mA x 24V) + (________ mA x 5V) + (________ mA x 24V)

= __________ mW + __________ mW + __________ mW

= __________ mW

= __________ W

Table 57 - Heat Dissipation

Catalog Number

Heat Dissipation

Equation or Constant Calculation Sub-Total

1763-L16AWA 15.2 W + (0.4 x System Loading) 15.2 W + (0.4 x ______ W) ______ W

1763-L16BWA 15.7 W + (0.4 x System Loading) 15.7 W + (0.4 x ______ W) ______ W

1763-L16BBB 17.0 W + (0.3 x System Loading) 17.0 W + (0.3 x ______ W) ______ W

1763-L16DWD 17.0 W + (0.3 x System Loading) 17.0 W + (0.3 x ______ W) ______ W

1762-IA8 2.0 W x number of modules 2.0 W x _________ ______ W

1762-IF4 2.0 W x number of modules 2.0 W x _________ ______ W

1762-IF2OF2 2.6 W x number of modules 2.6 W x _________ ______ W

1762-IQ8 3.7 W x number of modules 3.7 W x _________ ______ W

1762-IQ16

5.4 W

(1)

x number of modules 5.4 W

(1)

x _________

______ W

1762-IQ32T

6.8 W x number of modules (at 30.0V DC)

5.4 W x number of modules (at 26.4V DC)

6.8 W x _________ (at 30.0V DC)

5.4 W x _________ (at 26.4V DC)

______ W

1762-IR4 1.5 W x number of modules 1.5 W x _________ ______ W

1762-IT4 1.5 W x number of modules 1.5 W x _________ ______ W

1762-OA8 2.9 W x number of modules 2.9 W x _________ ______ W

1762-OB8 1.6 W x number of modules 1.6 W x _________ ______ W

1762-OB16 2.9 W x number of modules 2.9 W x _________ ______ W

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Appendix G System Loading and Heat Dissipation

1762-OB32T 3.4 W x number of modules 3.4 W x _________ ______ W

1762-OF4 3.8 W x number of modules 3.8 W x _________ ______ W

1762-OV32T 2.7 W x number of modules 2.7 W x _________ ______ W

1762-OW8 2.9 W x number of modules 2.9 W x _________ ______ W

1762-OW16

6.1 W

(1)

x number of modules 6.1 W

(1)

x _________

______ W

1762-OX6I 2.8 W x number of modules 2.8 W x _________ ______ W

1762-IQ8OW6 4.4 W x number of modules 4.4 W x _________ ______ W

Add Subtotals to determine Heat Dissipation ______ W

(1) Only applicable for series B and series C I/O modules.

Table 57 - Heat Dissipation (Continued)

Catalog Number

Heat Dissipation

Equation or Constant Calculation Sub-Total

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 169

Glossary

The following terms and abbreviations are used throughout this manual.

address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For example, I:1/0 is the memory

address for the data located in the Input file location word1, bit 0.

AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides a communication link between various networked devices.

1761-NET-AIC.

application 1) A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller.

2) The use of computer-based or processor-based routines for specific purposes.

baud rate The speed of communication between devices. All devices must communicate at the same

baud rate on a network.

bit The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 (ON) or a 0 (OFF).

block diagrams A schematic drawing.

Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND, OR, NAND, NOR, NOT, and Exclusive-OR that can be used

singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits. Can have an output response

of T or F.

branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program.

communication scan A part of the controller’s operating cycle. Communication with other devices, such as software

running on a personal computer, takes place.

controller A device, such as a programmable controller, used to monitor input devices and control output

devices.

controller overhead An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and set-up purposes.

control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions.

counter 1) An electro-mechanical relay-type device that counts the occurrence of some event. May be

pulses developed from operations such as switch closures or interruptions of light beams.

2) In controllers, a software counter eliminates the need for hardware counters. The software

counter can be given a preset count value to count up or down whenever the counted event

occurs.

CPU (Central Processing Unit) The decision-making and data storage section of a programmable controller.

data table The part of processor memory that contains I/O values and files where data is monitored,

manipulated, and changed for control purposes.

DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus (DIN) standards, a metal railing

designed to ease installation and mounting of your controller.

download Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to another device.

DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data, or both.

embedded I/O Embedded I/O is the controller’s on-board I/O.

EMI Electromagnetic interference.

encoder 1) A rotary device that transmits position information.

2) A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution.

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Glossary

executing mode Any run or test mode.

expansion I/O Expansion I/O is I/O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable. MicroLogix 1200

controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I/O.

false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung.

FIFO (First-In-First-Out) The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file.

file A collection of information organized into one group.

full-duplex A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received

simultaneously (contrast with half-duplex).

half-duplex A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one direction at a time.

hard disk A storage area in a personal computer that may be used to save processor files and reports for

future use.

high byte Bits 8…15 of a word.

input device A device, such as a push button or a switch, that supplies signals to the input circuits of the

controller.

inrush current The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized.

instruction A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed by the processor. A rung

in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions. The input instructions are

evaluated by the controller as being true or false. In turn, the controller sets the output

instructions to true or false.

instruction set The set of general purpose instructions available with a given controller.

I/O (Inputs and Outputs) Consists of input and output devices that provide and/or receive data from the controller.

jump Change in normal sequence of program execution, by executing an instruction that alters the

program counter (sometimes called a branch). In ladder programs a JUMP (JMP) instruction

causes execution to jump to a labeled rung.

ladder logic A program written in a format resembling a ladder-like diagram. The program is used by a

programmable controller to control devices.

least significant bit (LSB) The digit (or bit) in a binary word (code) that carries the smallest value of weight.

LED (Light Emitting Diode) Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs.

LIFO (Last-In-First-Out) The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file.

low byte Bits 0…7 of a word.

logic A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions that can

be either true or false. General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to

perform required decision making and computational functions.

Master Control Relay (MCR) A mandatory hard-wired relay that can be de-energized by any series-connected emergency

stop switch. Whenever the MCR is de-energized, its contacts open to de-energize all

application I/O devices.

mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of

information.

modem Modulator/demodulator. Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a

communication line.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 171

Glossary

modes Selected methods of operation. Example: run, test, or program.

negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that “0” represents the voltage level normally associated

with logic 1 (for example, 0 = +5V, 1 = 0V). Positive is more conventional (for example, 1 = +5V, 0

= 0V).

network A series of stations (nodes) connected by some type of communication medium. A network

may be made up of a single link or multiple links.

nominal input current The current at nominal input voltage.

normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de-energized or the switch is

deactivated; they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated. In ladder

programming, a symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is logic “0”

when evaluated.

normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de-energized or the switch is

deactivated. (They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated.) In ladder

programming, a symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is logic “1”

when evaluated.

off-delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that

a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller. The time is determined by

circuit component delays and by any filter adjustment applied.

offline Describes devices not under direct communication.

offset The steady-state deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point.

off-state leakage current When an ideal mechanical switch is opened (off-state) no current flows through the switch.

Practical semiconductor switches, and the transient suppression components which are

sometimes used to protect switches, allow a small current to flow when the switch is in the off

state. This current is referred to as the off-state leakage current. To ensure reliable operation,

the off-state leakage current rating of a switch should be less than the minimum operating

current rating of the load that is connected to the switch.

on-delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a

signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller.

one-shot A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan.

online Describes devices under direct communication. For example, when RSLogix 500 is monitoring

the program file in a controller.

operating voltage For inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state. For outputs, the

allowable range of user-supplied voltage.

output device A device, such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil, that is controlled by the controller.

processor A Central Processing Unit. See CPU (Central Processing Unit) on page 169.

processor file The set of program and data files used by the controller to control output devices. Only one

processor file may be stored in the controller at a time.

program file The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic program.

program mode When the controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs are de-energized.

program scan A part of the controller’s operating cycle. During the scan the ladder program is executed and

the output data file is updated based on the program and the input data file.

programming device Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Glossary

protocol The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network.

read To acquire data from a storage place. For example, the processor reads information from the

input data file to solve the ladder program.

relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits.

relay logic A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for relays.

restore To download (transfer) a program from a personal computer to a controller.

reserved bit A status file location that the user should not read or write to.

retentive data Information associated with data files (timers, counters, inputs, and outputs) in a program that

is preserved through power cycles.

RS-232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for serial

binary communication circuits. A single-ended serial communication interface.

run mode This is an executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the ladder program,

monitors input devices, energizes output devices, and acts on enabled I/O forces.

rung Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs. A rung contains input and output instructions.

During Run mode, the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false. If a path of true logic

exists, the outputs are made true. If all paths are false, the outputs are made false.

save To upload (transfer) a program stored in memory from a controller to a personal computer; OR

to save a program to a computer hard disk.

scan time The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program. The scan time

may vary depending on the instructions and each instruction’s status during the scan.

sinking A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and controller I/O circuit —

typically, a sinking device or circuit provides a path to ground, low, or negative side of power

supply.

sourcing A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and controller I/O circuit —

typically, a sourcing device or circuit provides a path to the source, high, or positive side of

power supply.

status The condition of a circuit or system, represented as logic 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).

terminal A point on an I/O module that external I/O devices, such as a push button or pilot light, are

wired to.

throughput The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding output turns on.

true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung.

upload Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another device.

watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle. If the

watchdog runs past its programmed time period, it causes a fault.

workspace The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage.

write To copy data to a storage device. For example, the processor writes the information from the

output data file to the output modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 173

Index

Numerics

1762-24AWA wiring diagram 35

1762-IA8 wiring diagram

1762-IF2OF2

input type selection

output type selection 45

terminal block layout

wiring

1762-IF4

input type selection

terminal block layout

1762-IQ16 wiring diagram

1762-IQ32T wiring diagram

1762-IQ8 wiring diagram

1762-OA8 wiring diagram

1762-OB16 wiring diagram

1762-OB32T wiring diagram

1762-OB8 wiring diagram

1762-OV32T wiring diagram

1762-OW16 wiring diagram

1762-OW8 wiring diagram

1762-OX6I wiring diagram

5/05 processors

Ethernet communications

155

address 169

Advanced Interface Converter. See AIC+

AIC+

applying power to

attaching to the network

connecting

definition 169

installing

recommended user supplied components

safety consideration

selecting cable

analog channel wiring guidelines 37

analog expansion I/O

137

diagnostics

137

module operation vs. channel operation

137

power-up diagnostics

137

system wiring guidelines

troubleshooting

137

analog inputs

analog channel wiring guidelines

application

169

battery 101

processor battery life expectancy

129

processor replacement battery

129

baud rate

169

bit

169

block diagrams

169

Boolean operators

169

BOOTP

configuring SLC 5/05

160 - 162

using the Rockwell Utility

161

branch

169

Buttons

cable pinout

MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to modem cable

57, 63

cables

planning routes for DH485 connections

150

selection guide for the AIC+ 65

calling for assistance

139

common mode rejection ratio

specification

124

communication

DeviceNet

Ethernet 68

communication connections

communication options

communication protocols

DF1 Full-Duplex

145

DF1 Half-Duplex

146

DH485 148

Ethernet

155

Modbus

154

communication scan

169

communications toggle push button

using

component descriptions 12

1762 expansion I/O

communication cables

memory module

real-time clock 12

configuration errors

138

connecting expansion I/O

connecting the system

AIC+

63, 67

DeviceNet network

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol

DF1 isolated point-to-point connection

DH485 network

connecting to DF1 Half-Duplex network

contactors (bulletin 100), surge suppressors

for

control profile

169

ControlFlash

missing/corrupt OS LED pattern

144

sequence of operation

143

using

141

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Index

controller 169

grounding

I/O wiring

LED status error conditions 135

LED status normal operation

135

minimizing electrical noise

mounting 24

mounting dimensions

mounting on DIN rail

mounting on panel

preventing excessive heat

status indicators

133

controller overhead 169

controller spacing

counter

169

CPU (Central Processing Unit)

169

Cursor display

data table 169

default communication configuration

DeviceNet Communications

DeviceNet network

connecting

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol

connecting

description 145

example system configuration

145

using a modem

56, 147

DF1 Half-Duplex protocol

description

146

DH485 communication protocol

configuration parameters

59, 149

DH485 network

configuration parameters

150

connecting 59

devices that use the network

149

example system configuration

152

installation 61

planning considerations

149

DIN rail

169

disconnecting main power

download

169

DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)

169

Electronics Industries Association (EIA) 145

EMI

169

encoder

169

error recovery model

136

errors

configuration

138

critical 137

extended error information field

138

hardware

138

module error field

137

non-critical

137

Ethernet

advanced functions

162

messaging

155

processor performance

155

using the SLC 5/05 processors

155

executing mode

170

expansion I/O

1762-IF2OF2 input type selection

1762-IF2OF2 output type selection

expansion I/O mounting 27

mounting on DIN rail

expansion I/O wiring

1762-IA8 wiring diagram

1762-IF2OF2 wiring

1762-IF4 terminal block layout

1762-IQ16 wiring diagram

1762-IQ32T wiring diagram

1762-IQ8 wiring diagram 39

1762-OA8 wiring diagram

1762-OB16 wiring diagram

1762-OB32T wiring diagram 42

1762-OB8 wiring diagram

1762-OV32T wiring diagram

1762-OW16 wiring diagram 43

1762-OW8 wiring diagram

1762-OX6I wiring diagram

analog wiring guidelines

extended error information field

138

false 170

FIFO (First-In-First-Out)

170

file

170

Full-Duplex

full-duplex

170

general considerations 15

grounding the controller

Half-Duplex 58, 170

hard disk

170

hardware errors

138

hardware features

heat dissipation

calculating

167

heat protection

high byte

170

I/O (Inputs and Outputs) 170

input device

170

input states on power down

inrush current

170

installing

ControlFlash software

141

memory module

instruction

170

instruction set

170

isolated link coupler

installing

isolation transformers

power considerations

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 175

Index

jump 170

ladder logic 170

least significant bit (LSB)

170

LED (Light Emitting Diode)

170

LIFO (Last-In-First-Out)

170

lithium battery (1747-BA)

disposing

131

handling

130

installing 129

storing

130

transporting

130

logic 170

low byte

170

master control relay 18

emergency-stop switches

using ANSI/CSA symbols schematic

using IEC symbols schematic 20

Master Control Relay (MCR)

170

master control relay circuit

periodic tests

memory module

data file protection

103

operation 102

program compare

102

program/data/recipe backup

102

removal/installation under power 103

write protection

103

Menu structure

minimizing electrical noise

mnemonic

170

Modbus communication protocol

154

modem

170

modems

using with MicroLogix controllers

147

modes

171

module error field

137

motor starters (bulletin 509)

surge suppressors

motor starters (bulletin 709)

surge suppressors

negative logic 171

network

171

nominal input current

171

normally closed

171

normally open

171

offline 171

Offline Editing

105

offset

171

off-state leakage current

171

one-shot

171

online

171

Online Editing

105

Terms

105

Operating buttons

operating voltage

171

output device

171

performance

Ethernet processor

155

planning considerations for a network

149

power considerations

input states on power down

isolation transformers

loss of power source 17

other line conditions

overview

power supply inrush

power distribution

power source

loss of

power supply inrush

power considerations

preparing for upgrade 141

preventing excessive heat

processor

171

processor file

171

program file

171

program mode

171

program scan

171

programming

programming device

171

protocol

172

real-time clock

battery operation

101

operation

101

removal/installation under power

101

writing data

101

relay

172

relay logic

172

relays

surge suppressors for

remote packet support

151

replacement battery

129

disposing

131

handling 130

installing

129

storing

130

transporting

130

replacement kits

129

replacement parts

129

reserved bit

172

restore

172

retentive data

172

RS-232

172

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Index

RS-232 communication interface 145

run mode

172

rung

172

safety circuits 16

safety considerations

disconnecting main power

hazardous location

master control relay circuit

periodic tests

periodic tests of master control relay circuit

power distribution

safety circuits 16

save

172

scan time

172

sinking

172

sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams

sinking wiring diagram

1762-24BWA

sourcing

172

sourcing wiring diagram

1762-24BWA

36, 37

status 172

surge suppressors

for contactor

for motor starters

for relays

recommended 32

using

system configuration

DF1 Full-Duplex examples

145

DH485 connection examples 152

system loading

example calculations

165

limitations

165

worksheet 166

system loading and heat dissipation

165

terminal 172

terminal block layouts

1762-IF2OF2

1762-IF4

controllers

terminal groupings

throughput

172

Trimpot Information Function File

trimpot operation

trimpots

changing values

96, 97

error conditions

location

troubleshooting

133

true

172

upload 172

using communications toggle functionality

using communications toggle push button

using emergency-stop switches

using memory modules

101

using real-time clock

101

using trimpots

wiring diagram

1762-IA8

1762-IF2OF2 differential sensor

1762-IF2OF2 single-ended sensor 47

1762-IQ16

1762-IQ32T

1762-IQ8 39

1762-L24BXB output

1762-OA8

1762-OB16

1762-OB32T

1762-OB8

1762-OV32T 42

1762-OW16

1762-OW8

1762-OX6I 44

1763-L16AWAE input

1763-L16AWAE output

1763-L16BBBE sinking 36

1763-L16BBBE sourcing

1763-L16BWAE output

1763-L16BWAE sinking 36

1763-L16BWAE sourcing

terminal block layouts

33, 46, 48

wiring diagrams 33

wiring recommendation

wiring your controller

workspace

172

write

172

Rockwell Automation Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024 177

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual

Publication 1763-UM001G-EN-P - May 2024

Rockwell Automation Support

Use these resources to access support information.

Documentation Feedback

Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our content, complete the

form at rok.auto/docfeedback

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental compliance information on its website at rok.auto/pec.

Technical Support Center

Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, Knowledgebase, and product

notification updates.

rok.auto/support

Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the telephone number for your country. rok.auto/phonesupport

Technical Documentation Center

Quickly access and download technical specifications, installation instructions, and user

manuals.

rok.auto/techdocs

Literature Library Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications. rok.auto/literature

Product Compatibility and Download Center

(PCDC)

Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product

release notes.

rok.auto/pcdc

At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

Allen-Bradley, ControlFLASH, DH+, DTAM Micro, DTAM Plus, expanding human possibility, FactoryTalk, INTERCHANGE, MicroLogix, PanelView, PLC-5, Rockwell Automation, RSLinx, RSLinx Classic,

RSLogix 500, SLC, SLC 5/03, SLC 500, and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

CIP, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA, Inc.

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.